diff options
Diffstat (limited to '44897.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 44897.txt | 7317 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 7317 deletions
diff --git a/44897.txt b/44897.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1ba90b6..0000000 --- a/44897.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7317 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Grammar of the New Zealand language (2nd -edition), by Robert Maunsell - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - - -Title: Grammar of the New Zealand language (2nd edition) - -Author: Robert Maunsell - -Release Date: February 14, 2014 [EBook #44897] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ASCII - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GRAMMAR OF NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE *** - - - - -Produced by Heiko Evermann, Chris Pinfield and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This -book was produced from scanned images of public domain -material from the Google Print project.) - - - - - -Transcriber's Note: - -In the text a macron indicates a long vowel and a breve indicates a -short vowel. In this version a long "a" is denoted by "[=a]" and a -short "a" by "[)a]"; and similarly for the other vowels. - -The text makes extensive use of italics, which are indicated by -_underscores_. Small capitals have been rendered in upper case. - -Various notes and remarks of less importance to a beginner are printed -in smaller type (c.f. last paragraph of the Preface to the First -Edition). In this version they have been indented by one space. - -There are minor inconsistencies beween the sections listed in the Table -of Contents and those in the text itself. - -Braces extending over more than one line have been replaced by -columns of individual braces. - -Inconsistent hyphenation has been retained. Apparent errors of -punctuation, capitals and italics, that are inconsistent with the -sense of the text, have been corrected. - -Apparent errors or obscure type affecting Maori or English spelling -have also been corrected. The former are listed at the end of the -text. - - - - -GRAMMAR - -OF THE - -NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE, - -BY - -R. MAUNSELL, L. L. D., - -ARCHDEACON OF WAIKATO. - - -SECOND EDITION. - - -AUCKLAND: - -PUBLISHED BY W. C. WILSON, SHORTLAND-STREET, - -1862. - - -AUCKLAND: - -PRINTED BY W. C. WILSON, "NEW ZEALANDER" OFFICE. - - - - -PREFACE. - - -The first edition of this Grammar having been for many years -exhausted, and a considerable demand for some means of acquiring an -accurate knowledge of the Maori language having recently arisen, the -author has been induced to republish the work with such alterations as -the attention which he has in the meantime given to the subject, -during long labours of translation, has caused him to deem advisable. - -Amongst the principal of these alterations is the omission of many -passages exhibiting extreme niceties of the language, which, although -useful to the finished scholar, were thought to be scarcely necessary -to the ordinary student, and were complained of as embarrassing to the -beginner. - -The author begs to express his acknowledgments to his friend Mr. -Fenton, late Resident Magistrate of Waikato, and one of the few who -have studied the language grammatically, for carrying the present work -through the press. - - Kohanga, Waikato, - January, 1862. - - - - -PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. - - -Independently of minute and numerous subdivisions, it may, perhaps, be -correct to state that there are spoken in this the northern island -seven leading dialects, each more or less distinguished from the -other--viz., 1st, the Rarawa, or that spoken to the northward of -Kaitaia; 2nd, the Ngapuhi, or that spoken in that portion of the -island as far south of Kaitaia as Point Rodney on the eastern coast, -and Kaipara on the western; 3rd, the Waikato, or that spoken in the -district lying between Point Rodney and Tauranga on the east, and -Kaipara and Mokau on the west; 4th, that spoken in the Bay of Plenty; -5th, the dialect of the East Cape and its neighbourhood, in which, -perhaps, may be included that of Rotorua, though in these two places -many little differences might be detected; 6th, that spoken in the -line of coast between Port Nicholson and Wanganui, though here, also, -at least four distinct branches might be traced; 7th, and last, that -spoken between Wanganui and Mokau. The dialect of Taupo may be, -perhaps, considered a mixture of those of Rotorua and Waikato. - -All these may be stated to bear to each other a remarkable radical -affinity. Many words, it is true, may be found in one which are -unknown in another; but the grammar of _any_ will give a great insight -into the texture of _all_. - -The Waikato dialect is very generally known throughout the larger -portion of the island. It has deeply tinctured that of Taupo, is well -known at Tauranga and the Bay of Plenty, and has been carried to the -summits of Taranaki by the multitudes whom its fierce warriors once -dragged from thence in slavery, and whose chains have been since -snapped by the power of the Gospel. Ngapuhi to the northward are well -acquainted with it, from the number of slaves who had been fetched -from thence by the warrior Hongi; and a little before his time it was -carried to the neighbourhood of Port Nicholson by two large and -distinct migrations--one by Ngatitoa, who were the original possessors -of Kawhia, another by Ngatiraukawa, who formerly occupied Maungatautari, -and as far as Taupo. - -The four tribes also who now occupy the banks of the Thames resided, -formerly, for a very long period, in Waikato, and, being sprung from -the same stock, speak a language so similar that a critical ear can -scarcely tell the difference between the dialects of the two people.[1] - -The origin of this people,--what part of this island was first -occupied,--whether it was not colonized by different migrations from -different islands,--are points as yet buried in darkness. - -That it was not occupied by merely one migration has ever been the -opinion of the author since he heard of the different condition and -habits of the people of the East Cape and those of Waikato. A survey -of the different dialects will confirm the conjecture, and nowhere can -we get a better illustration than at Taupo. For that magnificent lake, -in the centre of the island, and the point of meeting for two parties, -as they approach from either coast, presents also a remarkable -diversity in the languages spoken on the eastern and western banks. On -the eastern, the dialect corresponds closely with that of Rotorua, -from which it is distant about a four days' journey; on the -north-western, which is occupied by a remnant left by the Ngatiraukawa -in their great migration to the southward, the dialect is remarkably -similar to that spoken in Waikato.[2] - -The points of similarity between the fundamental principles of the -Hebrew language and those of Maori have been occasionally noticed: -not, however, because the author entertains any opinion that the two -languages can claim any direct relationship to each other. Upon this -only would he insist, in reply to those who would bind him down to the -model of some of the European grammars, that Maori, like Hebrew, is -altogether different from those languages in structure; that every -subject of scientific inquiry must have rules and an arrangement -suited to its nature; and that, as it would be absurd to construct the -English on the basis of the Latin, so would it be more out of course -to think of finding in Maori declensions, conjugations, modes of -comparison, &c., &c., as accurately defined, or conducted on the same -principles, as those of languages so polished, and so adapted for -expressing, as well the minutest varieties in thought, as the -tenderest emotions of the feelings. - -And here the author would acknowledge his obligations to Professor Lee -for his theory of the Hebrew tenses. On no other hypothesis can a -satisfactory solution be given of the Maori tense. - -The student is requested to notice that the remarks that are more -suited to a beginner are printed in large type, and that matters which -are of less importance to him are contained in the smaller. It will -be, perhaps, most advisable for him to omit the perusal of the latter -until he has mastered the former. - - Waikato Heads, - February, 1842. - - -[1] Marutuahu, from Kawhia, is the great progenitor of the Thames -tribes, and his name is often used to designate that people. Kawhia, -we may add, is the place at which, according to the accounts of the -people of Waikato, Taranaki, as well as those of Ngatiruanui, the -early immigrants landed. - -[2] These remarks might also be extended to Rotorua lakes, on the -north-western extremity also of which are residing another remnant of -Ngatiraukawa, whose dialect is, as far as the author recollects, -different from that spoken by Ngatiwakaane. - - - - -EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS. - - adj.--_adjective_. - - adv.--_adverb_. - - n.--_noun_. - - part. adj.--_participial adjective_. - - v.--_verb_. - - v. a.--_verb active_. - - vid. S.--_denotes that further information will be found in the - Syntax_. - - - - -TABLE OF CONTENTS. - - - CHAP. I. - ORTHOEPY. - - The letters of Maori 1 - Of the sound of the Vowels 1-4 - Of the Diphthongs 4-7 - Homogeneous sounds, when they meet in a sentence 7 - Of the Consonants 7-9 - A table of peculiarities of pronunciation in the principal - dialects 9 - - - CHAP. II. - OF THE ARTICLE. - - The Articles 10 - Of the definite article _te_ 10-12 - Of its plural _nga_ 12 - Of the indefinite article _he_ 12 - Of _te tahi_ when used as an article 12-13 - Of the particle _a_ 13-15 - - - CHAP. III. - OF THE NOUNS. - - Nouns primitive and derivative 16 - Compound words 17 - Verbal nouns 17-18 - Proper names 18-19 - Gender of nouns 19-20 - Number of nouns 21 - Of the postfix _ma_ 21 - Reduplication of nouns 21 - Cases of nouns 22 - - - CHAP. IV. - OF THE ADJECTIVES. - - Their gender, number, and case 23 - Reduplication of 23 - - - CHAP. V. - OF THE NUMERALS. - - Of the cardinals 24 - Their prefixes 24 - Their manner of combination, &c. 25 - _Prefixes_ for denoting - ----persons 26 - ----distribution 26 - ----fractions of length 26 - _Ordinals._ - Three ways for denoting them 26 - - - CHAP. VI. - OF THE PRONOUNS. - - Of the personal pronouns 27-29 - Of the possessive pronouns 29 - Of the relative pronouns 29-30 - Of the demonstrative pronouns 30-31 - Of _nei_, _na_, and _ra_ 30 - Of the interrogative pronouns 31 - Mode of supplying the defect of distributive pronouns 32 - Of the indefinite pronouns 32-33 - - - CHAP. VII. - OF THE VERBS. - - _Verbs_ primitive, derivative, and compound 34-35 - Mood 35-36 - Tense 36-38 - Imperative mood 39-42 - Paradigm of tense in simple sentences 42-52 - Passive voice (table of examples) 48 - ----remarks on 49 - Verbal nouns (their formation) 51-52 - Neuter verbs 52 - Participial adjectives 53 - - - CHAP. VIII. - OF THE PREPOSITIONS. - - List of prepositions 55-56 - Remarks on them 56-64 - Proper meaning of _na_, _ma_, &c. 64-72 - - - CHAP. IX. - OF THE ADVERBS. - - Primitive and derivative adverbs 73-74 - Classification and list of adverbs and adverbial - expressions 74-86 - - - CHAP. X. - OF THE PARTICLES. - - Atu, mai, ake, iho, ai, ano, ra, koa, u, hoki, kau 87-94 - - - CHAP. XI. - - Of the conjunctions 95-98 - - - CHAP. XII. - - Of the interjections 99-101 - - - CHAP. XIII. - OF THE SYNTAX. - - _Preliminary Remarks._ - Terms explained 102 - Complex and incomplex propositions 103 - Remarks on the general features of Maori 103-104 - Epanorthosis 104-105 - - - CHAP. XIV. - SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. - - _Ko_ an article 106 - Its peculiar features 106-109 - The omission of the article 109 - _He_ and _te tahi_ 109-110 - The particle _a_ 110-111 - - - CHAP. XV. - SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. - - Nouns in apposition 112 - Article prefixed to them 112 - Preposition 113 - Exceptions 113-114 - Clauses in epanorthosis, irregularity of 114 - The answer to a question, construction of 114-115 - - _Possessive Case denotes_ - ----Intensity 115 - ----Date of an act 115 - ----Useful in predication 115 - ----Used instead of other cases 116 - ----Position of, when the governing word is twice - repeated 116 - ----Governing word often omitted 116 - Material, or quality, of a thing how denoted by a - substantive 116-117 - The form of the substantive often used for that of - the adjective 117 - - _Objective Case._ - ----position of 117-118 - How compound words govern others 118 - _Kai_ prefixed to a verb 118 - _Te_ prefixed to proper names 118 - _Ngati_ and _rangi_ 118 - _O_ and _A_, distinction between 118-120 - - - CHAP. XVI. - SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. - - Position of adjectives 121 - Verbal adjectives 121 - Exceptions 121-122 - Many adjectives to one substantive 122 - One adjective to two or more substantives 122-123 - Of the forms occasionally assumed by the adjective 123 - Comparison of adjectives 123-125 - - - CHAP. XVII. - - SYNTAX OF NUMERALS. - - Particles prefixed to numerals 126-127 - Case following 127 - Position of numeral 127 - Repetition of numeral 127-128 - _Tua_ and _whaka_ as numeral prefixes 128-129 - - - CHAP. XVIII. - SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. - - Position of pronouns 130 - Often omitted 130-131 - Singular and dual often denote a tribe 131 - ----Other uses of 131 - A Pronoun in the singular will refer to a noun - in the plural 131 - ----in the third person will refer to the first - or second person 131-132 - ----used for the conjunction _and_ 132 - The noun belonging to the pronoun often omitted 132 - _Relative Pronouns_, the substitutes for them 132-133 - - _Demonstrative Pronouns._ - ----useful as auxiliaries 133 - ----other peculiarities of 133-134 - _Nei_, _na_, and _ra_ 134 - Interrogative Pronouns (strange use of) 134-135 - - - CHAP. XIX. - SYNTAX OF THE VERB. - - _The Verbal Particles._ - _E_ 136-137 - _Ana_ 137 - _E--ana_ 138 - _Ka_ 138-139 - _I_ 139 - _Kua_ 139-142 - _Kia_ 143-144 - _Kia_ and _ki te_, distinction between 144 - Sometimes no verbal particle prefixed 144-145 - _Ai_, as used in connexion with the verb 145-147 - _Whaka_, uses of 147-149 - Adverbs as auxiliaries 149 - Defect of substantive verb, how supplied 149-150 - Prepositions as auxiliaries 150 - Tendency of Maori verb to assume the form of a substantive 150-152 - The finite verb may follow the oblique case 152 - Predication performed by the possessive case 152-155 - Compound tenses 155 - Other circumstances which affect the time or voice of a verb 155-159 - Verbs associated to qualify each other 159 - Repetition of verbs 159 - ----of other words 159-160 - _Passive verbs_, use of 160 - Sometimes supplanted by the active 160-162 - _Neuter verbs_ which assume the passive form 162 - - - CHAP. XX. - OF THE PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND CONJUNCTIONS. - - 163-167 - - - - -CHAPTER I. - -OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF MAORI. - - -THE LETTERS OF MAORI ARE AS FOLLOWS: - - NAME. - A. | _a_ as in f_a_ll f_a_t. - E. | _e_ as a in _a_corn. - H. | _ha_. - I. | _i_ as i in French or _ee_ in sl_ee_p. - K. | _ka_. - M. | _ma_. - N. | _na_. - O. | _o_. - P. | _pa_. - R. | _ra_. - T. | _ta_. - U. | _u_. - W. | _wa_. - NG. | _nga_. - - -OF THE SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. - - -A. - -Has three sounds; the slender, somewhat broader, and the full broad -sound. - -1. The slender, as in hat, pat. - -2. The somewhat broader; as in mar, far, father. - -3. The full broad; as in wall, hall, &c. - -The following is a list of words classified under these heads: - - 1. | 2. | 3. - | | - p_a_tu, _to strike_. | p_a_tu, _partition of a| - | house_. | - | | - m_[)a]_tu_a_, _a father_. | m_[=a]_tua, _fathers_. | whana, _to kick_. - | | - m_[)a]_r_a_m_a_, _the | m_[=a]_rama, _tight_. | wahi, _a place_. - moon_. | | - | | - t_a_ki, _to drag a canoe | t_a_ki, _take from the | whaki, _to confess_. - in water_. | fire_. | - | | - m_a_teng_a_, _death_. | m_a_tenga, _head_. | ware, _a plebeian_. - | | - t_[)a]_ringa, _ear_. | t_[=a]_ringa, _waiting | - | for_. | - | | - p_[)a]_k_a_ru, _broken_. | p_[=a]_karua, v. p. | - | _broken_. | - | | - p_a_keke, _hard_. | p_a_keke, _to creak_. | - | | - t_[)a]_ng_a_t_a_, _a man_.| ..... ..... | t_[=a]_ngata, _men_. - | | - t_a_hu, _to burn_. | tahuhu, _a ridgepole_. | whare, _a house_. - | | - -The second and third head differ but little from each other, and it -sometimes may be difficult to decide under which of the two the sound -should be classed. - -The reader is requested to notice that the distinctions above made, -are not founded so much on the length of the sound, as on the -differences of the sounds themselves. If the length of the sound be -considered, other classes, (at least two,) might easily be -established; but the learner would, we fear, be more perplexed than -benefitted by the addition. - -The speaker should remember that in some compound words the last -syllable of the first word, if it end in a, is pronounced strong; -_e. g._ - - Patung[=a]-poaka; _place where pigs are killed_. Ma-hing[=a]-kai; _a - cultivation_. Mat[=a]-pu; _the lead of a gun, a bullet_. Ta te - tutu[=a] tu; _the plebeian's manners_. - - NOTE.--There are exceptions to this rule which it would be well for - the student of observation to notice. - -In pronouncing such words as kata, mata, tata, the speaker must be -careful not to slur over the first _a_, as if it were k_e_ta, m_e_ta, -&c. It should be pronounced clearly and distinctly. - - -E - -Is pronounced as _a_ in bate, hate, &c., only not quite so slow, or so -broad. Perhaps the final _e_ in the French words cafe, felicite, would -be a closer resemblance; e. g., koe, rea, re, ket_e_, ma_te_, _te_nei, -rer_e_. - -(2.) As _e_ in _poe_tical, _th_ere; e. g., _te_na, _ren_ga-_ren_ga, -_ke_te, _re_re. - - Few sounds in Maori are more frequently mis-pronounced by foreigners - than _e_. To_he_, nga_re_, ku_mea_, ho_ea_ mai _te_ waka, _te_ - reinga, _te_ rangi, rew_er_a, kor_er_o, have been all so carelessly - pronounced as to sound to the native ear as if spelt, to_hi_, ngari, - kumia, ho_ia_ mai _ti_ waka, _to_ reinga, _to_ rangi, Rewara, kororo. - The reader should also be careful not to give _e_ the dipthongal - sound of ei; as in ne the interrogative particle, &c. - - -I - -I is pronounced like the French _i_; as _ee_ in sleep, green, &c.; -when distinctly and fully pronounced it imparts much melodiousness to -the sentence; e. g. ar_i_k_i_, k_[=i]_k_i_, _to chatter_, &c. - -In the following it has a shorter sound: k_[)i]_ki, _crowded_; -m_[)i]_ti, t_[)i]_ti, &c. - - N. B.--The speaker should be careful not to confound _i_ with the - Maori _e_; as in such words as wakatoi, hoi, &c. - -O - -Has a long and a short sound, a long; as toto, _to drag_. - -A short; as toto, _blood_. - - N. B.--We have no sound in Maori to correspond to the o in _not_, - _hot_, _pot_, &c. - - -U - -This sound is also uniform in kind, and always corresponds to _oo_ in -b_oo_k, &c. It sometimes, however, experiences a more quick, sometimes -a more slow pronunciation. - -The following table exhibits two variations beginning with the -shorter:-- - - 1. | 2. - | - t_[)u]_ri, _a knee_. | t[)u]t_[=u]_, _disobedient_. - | - t[)u]t[)u], _same as tupakihi of_ | t[=u]t[=u] (manu), _a birdstand_. - Ngapuhi. | - | - k[)u]k[)u], _a shell_. | k[=u]k[=u], _a pigeon_. - | - k[)u]hu. | t[=u]t[=u]a. - | - | h_[=u]_na. - | - [)u]t[)u], _to pay_. | [=u]tu, _to draw water_. - - In pronouncing _u_ the speaker will have to guard against the error - of those who prefix the aspirate when no aspirate is admissible. - According to them _u_, _utu_, &c., are pronounced as if spelt _hu_, - _hutu_. - - He will also have to beware of the more common and stubborn error of - giving _u_ the dipthongal sound of _u_ in _cube_, - _tube_, _mute_, &c.--tonu, ketu, tonutia, are, in this way, - pronounced as if spelt ton_iu_, toniutia, ketiu. - - _U_, again, is sometimes, by careless speakers, confounded with _o_, - and _vice versa_. Thus ihu, _nose_; niho, _tooth_; have been - erroneously pronounced as if spelt iho, nihu. - - -OF THE DIPTHONGS. - -This portion of Maori literature has been as yet but little explored; -and as each person's notions will vary with the acuteness of his ear, -and the extent to which his judgment has been exercised, we may be -prepared to expect a considerable discrepancy of opinion. - -We shall therefore proceed with caution, and offer only what may be -most useful, and most necessary for the student. - -The field of discussion may be much limited if we first define what we -mean by the word "dipthong." - -The best definition we can find, and the one most suited to the nature -of the dipthong, is, we think, that of Mr Smith, in Walker. "A -dipthong," he says, "I would define to be two simple vocal sounds -uttered by one and the same emission of breath, and joined in such a -manner that each loses a portion of its natural length; but from the -junction produceth a compound sound equal in the time of pronouncing -to either of them taken separately, and so making still but one -syllable." - -Following this definition, three tests for a dipthong suggest -themselves. - -1. The emission of the two sounds by the same breath. - -2. Their amalgamation, or more correctly, their coalescing; for each -vowel in the Maori dipthong is distinctly heard. - -3. The abbreviation of the natural length of each simple sound. - -In applying these rules to the dipthongs, it will be perhaps most -prudent to divide them, under the present imperfect state of our -knowledge, into two classes. 1. The certain, or those of the -dipthongal character of which there can be but little question. 2. The -doubtful, or those upon which inquirers may be likely to entertain -different opinions. - -The dipthongs which we consider certain, are as follows: - - aa, ae, ai, ao, au, ee, ei, ii, oo, ou, uu. - -On these we will offer a few remarks. - -Those dipthongs which are formed by a double letter, such as _aa_, are -distinguished by a stronger and fuller sound; as in Wakaaro, -rap_uu_tu, &c. - - -AE - -Is a sound for which it is difficult to find a parallel in English, -and which most speakers confound with _ai_ in such words as waewae, -waeroa, paewae, &c. - -The English _aye_ comes perhaps closer to it. It must be pronounced -broad and open, and care must be taken to keep out the squeezed sound -of the i. - - -AI - -May be well represented by the _i_ in shine. - - -AO - -Has no representative in English that we are aware of. In pronouncing -it, the speaker must be careful to let the _o_ be distinctly, but not -too prominently, heard; and considerable care will be required to keep -it distinct from _au_ in the following words, as otawhao, whawhao, -tao, hao, &c.: neither again must the speaker divide the dipthong into -two syllables, as some speakers do in otaota, &c. - - -AU - -May be pronounced like ou in drought, trout, pound, &c. - - -EI - -May be represented by the _ai_ in _hail_, _pail_, &c. Care must be -taken not to suppress altogether the _i_, as is sometimes done in such -words as ten_e_i, penei, &c. - - -OU - -Is a sound of some difficulty. There is no sound that we are aware of -in the English language that exactly corresponds to it. Low, sow, mow, -&c., may be made to resemble it, by pronouncing them slowly, and -letting the sound die away into _u_. - - Most foreigners are apt to pronounce it as a simple _o_. The first - syllable of _koutou_ is one of very difficult pronunciation. Without - great care it will be variously pronounced, as if koitou, kotou, or - kutu. - - By not attending to these distinctions the speaker will often lose - the benefit of a good thought. A speaker, guarding his hearers - against spiritual temptations, borrowed his illustration from a - _poukaka_ (the perch for the parrot by which it is caught,) telling - them that Satan often presents poukakas to attract them to ruin; - unfortunately, however, instead of _pou_kaka he used _po_kaka, _a - squall of wind and rain_, and only expressed his point by exciting - their risibility. - -The doubtful class of dipthongs are au, (as in mau, _for thee_, tau, -_thy_,) ai, (as in maia, _brave_) ea, eo, eu, io, iu. - - On these we do not wish at present to make many observations. We - believe that there is a considerable difference amongst Maori - speakers respecting them. Our own idea is, that there may be a few - occasions on which some might be considered dipthongs; and that those - occasions are, the position of the syllable, whether at the end of - the word, or elsewhere, as also whether it come under the influence - of the accent. - - We cannot dismiss this subject without mentioning two particulars, - very necessary to be remembered by all who wish to attain to an - accurate pronunciation of Maori. First, as it is in English, every - sentence is to be pronounced as if one word. 2. Homogeneous vowels - will, when they meet, almost always run into a dipthong. - - The following sentence, _koia i whiriwhiria ai e ia to ratou uri_, - would be thus pronounced by a native, _koiai-whiri-whiriai-eia-to- - ratouri_. _Koia ia i riri ai_ would run, _koiai-aiririai_. - - This subject of homogeneous vowels coalescing into dipthongs, is one - which has not received the attention it merits. - - -OF THE CONSONANTS. - - -H. - -This is the same as the English _h_. - -It is not however known on the western coast of New Zealand to the -southward of Mokau, in the district of Taranaki. Its place is supplied -by a curious stammer or jirk of the voice. A gentle sibilancy -accompanies its pronunciation amongst Ngapuhi, which some speakers -erroneously confound with _sh_. - - -K. - -K has the sound of the English _k_; as in kill, &c. - - -M. N. P. - -M, N, P, have the same sound as in English. - - -R. - -R has two sounds: (1) rough; as in _rain_, _river_, &c.; e. g., -kaho_r_e, _r_o_r_ea, roro, _r_oto. - -(2) The second is more soft, and is formed by a gentle jar of the -tongue against the palate; so gentle indeed is the vibration, that -most foreigners pronounce it like _d_ or _l_, as in _r_aro, ru_r_u, -_r_imu, poua_r_u, pa_r_i, mu_r_i, ma_r_i_r_i, koi_r_i, ko_r_iko_r_i, -kou_r_u, ma_r_u. - - -T. - -This is a letter which few Europeans pronounce correctly. It is not -pronounced like the _t_ in temper, tea, &c.; but rather like the sharp -_th_ of apa_th_y, sympa_th_y, A_th_ens, apo_th_ecary. Those who watch -a native's tongue while pronouncing this letter, will find that the -rule for attaining this sound is, to apply the tongue, not to the -root, but to the top of the teeth, and hardly emit _a_. - - -W. - -Has two sounds, one simple, as that in wind, &c., e. g., wai, _water_, -waka, _a canoe_, ware, _a plebeian_. - -2. An aspirated _w_, as in when, where, &c.; whai, _follow_, whare, _a -house_, &c. - - -NG. - -The speaker should be careful, in uttering this sound not to separate -the _n_ from the _g_, as is sometimes done by foreigners. The _n_ and -_g_ intimately coalesce, and those who have learned to pronounce the -French _encore_ will find no difficulty in catching it. The following -rule will, we trust, help the beginner. - -Press the middle of the tongue to the roof of the mouth, near the -throat, and simultaneously relax the pressure, and pronounce na. Of -course care must be taken that the tip of the tongue does not touch -the palate.[3] - - Following is a table setting forth a few of the variations in - pronunciation of the leading dialects of New Zealand. - - It will be observed that the name of a place is employed to denote the - dialect for which that place and its vicinity are remarkable. - - -------------+----------+--------+----------+-----------------+------------ - NGAPUHI. | WAIKATO. | EAST | ROTORUA. | TAUPO. | TARANAKI. - | | CAPE. | | | - -------------+----------+--------+----------+-----------------+------------ - Keri | Keri | | Kari | Kari | Kari - Tatou | Tatou | Tatau | Tatau | Tatou & Tatau | Tatou - Matou | Matou | Matau | Matau | Matou & Matau | Matou - Ratou | Ratou | Ratau | Ratau | Ratou & Ratau | Ratou - Koro & Korua | Korua | | | | - Koutou | Koutou | Koutau | Koutau | Koutou & Koutau | Koutou - Taua or Tao | Taua | Taua | Taua | | - Maua or Mao | Maua | Maua | Maua | | - Raua or Rao | Raua | Raua | Roua | | - Hei | Hei | Hai | Hai | Hai & Hei | Ei - Kei | Kei | Kai | Kai | Kai & Kei | Kei - Tutei | Tutai | Tutai | Tutai | Tutai | Tutei - Wha | | | | | Wa - Maoa | Maia | | | Maoa | Maia & Maoa - Hohou | Whawhau | | | Hohou & Whawhua | O-ou - Teina | Teina | Taina | Taina | Teina | Teina - Tarai | Tarai | | Tarei | Tarei | Tarai - Heoi | Heoti | | | Heoti | Eoi & Eoti - Kua | Kua | | Koua | Kua & Koua | Ku - Kia | Kia | Kia | Kia | Kia | Ki - Horo | Hohoro | | | | O-oro - Topa | Tao | | | Tao | Tao - Roa | | | | | Ro - Tonu | Tonu | Tou | | | - -------------+----------+--------+----------+-----------------+------------ - - See also the letters _ng_ and _h_. - -[3] This sound is not known in the Bay of Plenty. Its place is -supplied by a simple _n_, further southward by _k_. - - - - -CHAPTER II. - -OF THE ARTICLE. - - -Sec. 1. The articles in Maori are as follows:-- - -(a.) The definite article _te_ and its plural _nga_; e. g. - - _te_ tangata, _the man_. - _nga_ tangata, _the men_. - -(b.) The indefinite articles _he_, _tetahi_, and its plural _etahi_; -e. g. - - _Sing._ _he_ maripi, _a knife_. - _Plur._ _he_ maripi ena? _are those knives_? - _te tahi_ maripi, _a knife_. - _e tahi_ maripi, _knives_. - -(c.) The arthritic particles _a_ and _ko_; e. g. - - a Hone, _John_. - ko koe, _you_. - -Sec. 2. _Te_ is not so uniformly definite as the English _the_; being -sometimes used; - -(a.) Where no article would be employed in English, i. e., in cases -where the noun is taken in its widest sense; e. g. - - I ma _te_ kaipuke, _went by ship_. - He kino _te_ tutu, _disobedience is sinful_. - Ko _te_ rangi me _te_ wenua e pahemo, _Heaven and earth shall pass - away_. - -(b.) Sometimes it is employed instead of the English _a_; e. g. - - He mea kaha _te_ hoiho, _a horse is a strong thing_. - E kore _te_ tangata tika e wehi i _te_ mate, _a virtuous man fears - not death_. - -(c.) Sometimes it is used instead of the pronoun _some_; e. g. - - Kei tahaetia e _te_ tangata, _lest it should be stolen by some - person_; na _te_ tangata noa atu, _by some person or other_. - -(d.) It is employed for many other purposes which the English -_the_ does not recognize. We shall only mention the following; - - _Te_ tini o te kaipuke, _How many ships there are_! - - NOTE.--It has been asserted that _te_ is sometimes used in the plural - number, as in the preceding example, "_te_ kaipuke," and in the - following; _te_ tini o te tangata, _many men_; ka reka _te_ pititi, - _peaches are sweet_. - - We are more inclined to think that we have, in these examples, the - operation of a figure of frequent occurrence in Maori, viz., - synecdoche, and that one of a class is made to represent a whole class. - - Expressions of this kind are common in English, without involving the - plural number of the article; e. g., _the fruit of the tree_, _a - great many_, _a few men_, _&c._ Bishop Lowth's remarks on these - instances are quite to the point. - - "The reason of it, he says, is manifest from the effect which the - article has in these phrases; it means a small or great number, - collectively taken, and therefore gives the idea of a whole, that is, - of unity. Thus likewise, _a hundred_, _a thousand_ is one whole - number, an aggregate of many collectively taken; and therefore still - retains the article _a_, though joined as an adjective to a plural - substantive; as, _a hundred years_." - -(e.) Lastly, _te_ is sometimes employed before proper names; e. g. - - _Te Puriri_, _Te Uira_ - - NOTE 1.--To define the rule by which the article is prefixed or - omitted before proper names is a work of some difficulty, usage - being very irregular. - - NOTE 2.--Sometimes _te_ is blended with _o_ into one word; as in the - following example: ki _to_ Hone ware, to the house of John, instead - of ki _te_ whare _o_ Hone. - - NOTE 3.--The student should be careful, in speaking, to distinguish - between the article _te_, and the negative particle _te_. The latter - should always be pronounced more distinctly and forcibly than the - article. - -Sec. 3. _Nga_ may with strict propriety be called the plural of the -definite article. There are a few exceptions, or rather slight -variations, which we do not think it necessary to mention. - -Sec. 4. _He_ varies in some respects in its uses from the English _a_. - -(a.) It is used sometimes where no article would be employed in -English; e. g. - - A, ho atu ana e ratou _he_ moni ki a ia, _and they gave him money_. - -(b.) It is occasionally used in the same sense as _some_ in English, -e. g., - - kawea he wai, _fetch some water_. - -(c.) It is used in the plural number, e. g. - - He uwha kau aku poaka, _my pigs are all females_. - _He_ tini oku kainga, _my farms are many_. - -Sec. 5. A great many uses of the indefinite article are shared by _he_ -with _te tahi_. We shall mention here a few of them. - - Ho mai _te tahi_ maripi, _give me a knife_. - Tahuna mai _te tahi_ rama, _kindle a light_. - - N.B.--_Te tahi_ exactly corresponds with the definition given by - Bishop Lowth of the English article _a_. "It determines it (the thing - spoken of) to be one single thing of the kind, leaving it still - uncertain which." A similar use of the numeral _one_ we find in - French, sometimes in Hebrew, and more than once in the New Testament; - (vid. Mat. xxi. 19, and Mark xiv. 51.) - - We need not look abroad for parallel instances; our indefinite - article _an_ being, as every etymologist is aware, the Saxon article, - which signifies _one_. - -(b.) _Etahi_ may be considered as corresponding to the partitive -article _des_ of the French. It determines the things spoken of to be -any number of things of the kind, leaving it uncertain how many, or -which, of the things they are. It closely resembles the adjective -_some_ of English, and we enumerate it here among the articles because -it only differs from _te tahi_ (which is clearly an article) in being -its plural; e. g. - - Maku e tahi ika, _give me some fish_. - -Sec. 6. _A_[4] is a regular attendant on the personal pronouns; e. g. - - a koe, _you_; ki a ia, _to him_. - -(b.) It is also the article by which the names of individuals and -tribes are always preceded; e. g. - - a Hone, kei _a_ Hone _with John_; i _a_ Ngapuhi. - - NOTE 1.--When the particle _ko_ is prefixed to either the proper - name, or the pronoun, _a_ is omitted; e. g. - - _ko_ Hone, _ko_ ia. - - (2) It is also omitted after the prepositions _e_, _ma_, _mo_, _no_, - _na_, _o_, _a_. The prepositions with which it is retained are _i_, - _ki_, _kei_, and their compounds--i runga i, &c.; e. g. - - i runga i a Hone, _above John_. - - NOTE 2.--Europeans who have not made the language a study, often very - incorrectly substitute _e_ for _a_ before a proper name; e. g., they - will say, _kei hea e_ te Waru, where is _te Waru_, and again kua tae - mai _e Nanaia_, _Nanaia has arrived_. _E_, as we shall show hereafter, - is the sign of the vocative case. A is omitted before such words as - the following, kei nga _Pakeha_, kei nga _Maori_, &c. - - NOTE 3.--_A_ is sometimes in Waikato prefixed to appellatives; e. g. - ki _a_ tuahangata, _a_ papa, _a_ kara. - -(c.) A is also prefixed to the _names of places_, and to _prepositions_, -and _adverbs_ which have assumed the form of substantives, when in the -nominative case; e. g. - - Kua horo _a_ Pukerangiora, _Pukerangiora_ (the fort) _has been - stormed_. Kua tukua atu e ahau _a_ Whangarei mo Hone, I _have - given Whangarei to John_. Kua kainga _a_ runga o nga puka nei, - _the tops of the cabbage have been eaten off_. - A hea? _what place?_ A Rangitoto. - - NOTE.--Sometimes _a_ is prefixed to the name of the place when the - people of the place, and not the place itself, are intended; e. g. ka - mate i a Waikato, _will be killed by Waikato_. - - Some speakers are often guilty of solecisms from not remembering that - _a_ is not prefixed to any of the _oblique_ cases of the names of - places. Thus we heard some old residents in the land say, Haere ki - _a_ Pokuru, _Go to Pokuru_. Haere ki _a_ Waitemata, _Go to - Waitemata_. According to this form _Pokuru_, and _Waitemata_ are not - places, but persons. - -(d.) A is always prefixed to any _inanimate thing_ to which a name has -been given; i. e. to _trees_, _canoes_, _ships_, _boats_, _meres_,[5] -_guns_, &c.; e. g. - - Kei te tua i _a_ Ruhaia, _he is cutting down (the tree) Ruhaia_. E - waihape ana a Karapaina, _Columbine is tacking_. Mo to tahaetanga - i a Pahikoura, _for your having stolen (the mere[5]) Pahikoura_. - I toa ai a Hongi i whakawirinaki ia ki tana pu ki _a_ Tanumia, - _Hongi was brave because he trusted in his gun Tanumia_. - - NOTE.--Stars also come under the operation of this rule, e. g. - - Ko wai tena whetu i runga i _a_ Tawera, _what star is that above - Tawera_?[6] - Kua ara _a_ Matariki,[7] _Matariki has made his appearance_. - - Houses, Caves, and such like, are regulated by rule (c), e. g. - - Heoi ano nga tangata _kei_ a Puru o Waikato, _all the people have - mustered off to Puruowaikato--Wherowhero's house on the Waikato - river_. - - If the above rules be correct--and we are persuaded that the candid - inquirer will assent to them, the following remarks may, perhaps, be - worthy the consideration of our Missionary brethren. - - 1st. We think that we are distinctly warranted by the analogy of the - language to treat the books of the Old and New Testaments as proper - names, and prefix _a_ to them; as in the following examples, kei a - Kenehi, kei a Roma. Such portions however, as the Psalms, the Law, - the Acts, the Revelations, &c., might, we think, be most safely - considered as appellatives. Such an usage has obtained in English, - and will not, we believe, be thought a novelty in Maori, by any one - who attends to such sentences as the following: - - Kowai hei whakahua i ta tatou whangai hau? - I a wai? i _a_ Tu. - Ko hea te haua mai na? ko Puhimatarenga, &c. - - 2. The following sentences are incorrect: - - E haere mai _ana te Mihaia_. - Kua mate te Karaiti. - - N.B.--The speaker should distinguish between the article, and the - preposition _a_; as in the following sentence: - - Ekore ahau e kai i _a_ nga taurekareka, _I will not eat (the - food) of the slaves_. - - The preposition _a_ in these elliptical sentences should always be - pronounced peculiarly strong. - - He should also note the following; - - ki[)a] mea (with _short a_) is, "_to do_." - ki [=a] mea (with _long a_) is, _to such an one_, _to our friend_, - or in common parlance, (give it) _to what do ye call him_. - -[4] Some perhaps may object to our regarding _a_ as an article, and -may remind us of the definition that an article is "a word prefixed to -substantives to point them out, and show how far their signification -extends." This however is to make rules precede investigation, and our -reply is, that if Bishop Lowth, from whom this definition is derived, -had been writing on the Greek article, he would, most probably, have -never given such a definition. Every scholar is aware of the disputes -that have been agitated among the learned respecting the uses of this -article, and that some have even maintained "that its use is guided by -no rule at all." The fact is, every language has its peculiarities, -and it would be absurd to maintain that because any given part of -speech has certain powers in one language, it must have the same in -another. - -We denominate this article _arthritic_, because it is, as the Greeks -would say, an _arthron_, a _limb_ of the word to which it is prefixed, -though it in no way defines the extent of its signification; unless -perhaps we consider that, by its denoting the word to be either a -pronoun, a proper name, &c., it thus, in a certain measure, restricts -its application, and thus accords with the definition which some -writers would give of the article; viz., "an index to the noun." - -[5] The mere is a native weapon for war made of the axe stone. It is -an article of great value, and descends from father as an _oha_, an -heirloom in the tribe. - -[6] Tawera is the morning star. - -[7] This star makes his appearance about the month of June, in the -first month of the New Zealander, and creates an important epoch in -his agricultural operations. - - - - -CHAPTER III. - -OF THE NOUNS. - - -CLASSES OF NOUNS IN RESPECT TO ORIGIN. - -Nouns in Maori may be comprised under three classes, _primitive_ and -_derivative_, and _verbal_.[8] - -(a.) _Nouns primitive_ are those which designate _animals_, _plants_, -_numbers_, _members_ of the animal body, some of the _great objects of -the natural world_. - - N.B.--It is often impossible to distinguish between primitive and - derivative nouns. - -(b.) _Nouns derivative_, which are altogether the most numerous, -comprise, - -1st. Nouns derived from verbs, i. e., the verb, in its simple form, -used as a noun; e. g., - - He noho noa iho taku, _it is a simple sitting of mine_; _I have no - fixed object in stopping_ (here.) - He haere pai to haere? _Is your going a good going_, i. e., _are you - going with good intent?_ - -(2.) Nouns derived from _adjectives_; e. g., - - He aha te _pai_ o tena mea? _what is the worth of that thing?_ - Keihea te _pakaru_, _where is the broken place_? - -(3.) Nouns derived from adverbs and prepositions, e. g. - - He _kore_ rawa, _it is nil_. - Engari a _reira_ e pai ana, _there_ (or that place) _is better_. - Kua ki _a roto_, _the inside is full_. - Parua _a tua_, _coat the other side_ (with raupo.) - -(4.) _Compound Words._ These are always formed by two words placed in -immediate juxta-position, without any elision of either; e. g. - - Hia kai, (_desire food_) _hunger_; mate moe, (_craving sleep_), - _sleepiness_; hoa riri, (_angry friend_), _enemy_; mahi atawhai, - (_cherishing act_, _&c._) _a cherishing_, _&c._; kai whakaako, - (_one that teaches_) _a teacher_; kai whakamarie, (_one that - pacifies_) _a pacifier_; tangata atua, _a man having a God_; - tangata pakeha, _a man having a European to live with him_; he - hunga kainga, _a people having a place to reside on_; ahu taonga - (_bent on gain_) _avariciousness_; ahu whenua, (_having the mind - occupied with the earth_) _industriousness_, or _peaceableness_; - whenua rangatira, (_a noble land, not disturbed by invasions_) - _peace_; houhanga rongo, _making peace_; ngakau whakakake, - _pride_; he whare kore, (_a no house_) _homelessness_; he horoi - kore (_a no soap_) _soaplessness_; whakaaro kore, - _thoughtlessness_, _&c_. - -(c.) Verbal nouns are well worthy of the attention of the critical -student. They are of very extensive uses in Maori, and a proper -introduction of them will give animation and elegance to the sentence. -The rules for their formation will be found hereafter. See verbs. - -They are generally employed to denote _time_, _place_, _object_, -_means_, or some _accompaniment_ on, or _relation_ of the _act_, or -_quality_ of the ground form.--Other uses of them will be mentioned in -the syntax. - -To set forth the various uses of the verbal noun here would -carry us beyond our limits. We shall therefore only give a few -examples;--sufficient, however, we trust to lead the critical student -into more extensive inquiry; - - Ko tona moenga tena, _that is where he slept_. - Te pumautanga o te Whakaaro, _the full assurance of hope_; te - whakangarungarunga o te wai, _the troubling of the water_. - Te peheatenga i meatia ai, _the manner in which it was done_. - Te patunga poaka, _the place where the pigs are killed_. - Kahore aku kete kumara hei whakahokinga atu mo to puka, _I have no - basket of kumara with which to send back_, (_i. e._, _to pay for - the loan of_) _your spade_. - I te hanganga o te ao, _when the world was made_. - I ana inoinga, _in his prayers_, (_i. e._, _when he prayed_.) - Ko tona kiteatanga tenei, _this is the opportunity for looking for, - or seeing, it_. - To tatou nuinga, _the rest of our party_. - I taku oranga, _while I live_. - - NOTE.--Instances will sometimes occur in which the simple root, or - the verbal form, may be indifferently used in the sentence. The - critical student, however, will generally be able to see the reason; - e. g., te _here_ o tona hu, _the thong of his shoe_; te _herenga_ o - tona hu, _the holes, &c., by which the thong is fastened_. - -PROPER NAMES should, perhaps, have been classed under the head of -_derivative nouns_. - -They are epithets arbitrarily assumed, as among the Hebrews, from some -_circumstance, quality, act, or thing_. Sometimes they are simple; e. g., -ko te Tawa, _Tawa_ (_a tree_). Sometimes compound; e. g., -Tangikai, _cry for food_. They are generally known by _a_ prefixed; -when _a_ is not prefixed, by the context. - - NOTE.--Sometimes we meet with English appellatives employed as - appellatives in Maori, but with the form peculiar to proper names; e. - g., a mata, _the mistress_; a pepi, _the baby_; a tekawana, _the - governor_. These, however, must be regarded as solecisms, and as in - no way supported by Maori analogy.[9] - - We sometimes also meet with a Maori proper name employed as an - appellative; i. e., If an individual of a particular district has - been remarkable for any quality, his name will often be predicated of - any other in whom the same feature of character is discernible: thus, - Ropeti, of Waikato, was remarkable for making a great show of - hospitality:--hence, to any person else who has been detected acting - in a similar way, it will be said, Ko Ropeti, There is Ropeti. - - As all these terms are necessarily limited in their use to a - particular district, we need not notice them further. - - -OF GENDER, NUMBER, AND CASE. - -Maori, we may premise, admits of no such thing as declension by -inflection, i. e., by a variation of the ground form. All the -relations, it is capable of expressing, are denoted by words, or -particles, _pre_fixed or _post_-fixed to the noun. - -GENDER OF NOUNS.--Distinctions of gender are but seldom recognized in -Maori. Only two are ever noticed, viz., the _masculine_ and -_feminine_. These are always expressed by different words, e. g. - - MALE. | FEMALE. - Matua } | - or } _father_. | Whaea, _mother_. - Papa } | - Tamaiti } | Tamahine } - or } _son_. | or } _daughter_. - Tamaroa } | Kotiro } - Tungane, _brother of a female_. | Tuahine, _sister of a man_. - Autane, _brother-in-law of a female_.| Auwahine, _sister-in-law - | of the man_. - Tangata, _man_. | Wahine, _woman_. - Koroheke, _old man_. | Ruruhi, _old woman_. - Tourahi and Toa, _male of brute | Uwha, _female of brutes_. - animals_. | - Tane, _a male, mostly of the human | Wahine, _female_. - species_. | - -In salutation, the sex of the person is almost always denoted by the -address, e. g., - - _To the man._ _To the female._ - E hoa, _friend!_ { E kui } - E pa, ---- { } _to the married woman_. - E mara, ---- { E tai } - E koro, ---- - E kara, ---- { E ko } - E Ta, ---- { } _to the girl_. - E Hika, ---- { E Hine } - - NOTE 1.--It should, however, be noted that these modes of address - will vary in different Districts. Thus in Waikato _E Tai_ and _E ko_ - are often addressed to the male, and _E kui_ to the girl--again also, - _tane_ and _wahine_ will be often found applied to the brute - creation, and _tourahi_, in Waikato, is most frequently applied to - the _gelding_. - - NOTE 2.--The speaker should notice that the relationship of - individuals of the same sex is designated by the same terms as the - corresponding ones of the opposite sex; e. g., - - _John's_ | _Mary's_ - | - _elder brother_, is Tuakana. | _elder sister_, is Tuakana. - | - _younger brother_, teina. | _younger sister_, teina. - | - _brother-in-law_, taokete. | _sister-in-law_, taokete. - -The distinction of sex in the other branches, is generally designated -by tane and wahine postfixed to the relation; e. g., - - hunaonga wahine, _daughter-in-law_. - hungawai tane, _father-in-law_. - -NUMBER.--Substantives in Maori have _two_ numbers, singular and plural. - -The _singular_ is known by the singular articles _te_, and _tetahi_, -or by one of the singular pronouns connected with the noun; e. g. - - Te whare o Hone, _the house of John_. - Toku paraikete, _my blanket_. - -The _plural_ is known by (1) _nga_, _e tahi_, or (2) one of the plural -or dual pronouns preceding the noun; e. g. - - _nga_ wahine, _the women_. - _aku_ tupuna, _my forefathers_. - -(3.) Sometimes the plural is designated by _o_, without _te_ preceding -the noun; e. g. - - kei _o_ Hone matua pea, _with John's uncles, perhaps_. - -(4.) In a few cases we meet with an alteration in the ground form; -e. g., - - Tamaiti, _son_; Tamariki, _sons, or children_. - -(5.) In some trissyllables, the first syllable of the plural is -pronounced long; as in matua, tupuna, wahine, tangata. - - NOTE.--Examples of these two latter heads are not of frequent - occurrence. - -(6.) We frequently meet with _ma_ joined to the proper name, in a -sense corresponding to hoi _amphi_, and hoi _peri_ in Greek, to denote -_the person and his company_: e. g., - - Kei a Kukutai _ma_, _with Kukutai and his party_. - -(7.) Sometimes also _ma_ is in the same sense postfixed to -appellatives; e. g., - - E mara ma! E hoa ma! E ko ma! - -(8.) Sometimes an _act oft repeated_, or many things of the _same -kind_ are denoted by a reduplication of one or more syllables; e. g., - - Kakata, _a frequent laughing_. - Mamahi, _over-work_. - Kimokimo, _a winking of the eyes_. - - CASE.--The distinction of case in Maori is exceedingly simple. As it - is not the character of the language to decline either nouns or - adjectives by a variation of the termination, it is evident that, in - this respect, Maori is altogether different from Greek and Latin. Are - we then to adopt the cases that those languages so clearly need? We - are aware that some contend for them. But we are also assured that - their adoption would be, not only useless but often exceedingly - perplexing. - - It is true that prepositions may be found in Maori, as well as in - English, that correspond with the cases that are to be found in those - languages. But that, we submit, is not the question. Our business, we - conceive should be, to inquire how the dependence of words on each - other is denoted in Maori, and then look out for a system that will - meet, not a few selected cases, but all the various possible - conditions. - - Now, in Maori, the different connexions and relations of one thing to - another are denoted by prepositions; there are upwards of twenty - prepositions; and these are capable of being much increased in number - by combination with each other; all having distinct meanings, - different relations, and therefore distinct cases. Are all these then - to be reduced to the six cases of Latin? Those who please may make - the experiment with the following; kei runga i te pouaka, kei te - kainga, ho atu ki a ia, me titiro atu ki a ia, patua ia ki te rakau, - hei tua i te whare, &c. - - The simple and comprehensive cases of Murray's English Grammar seem - therefore the best adapted for Maori, though we will confess that our - own judgment is against allowing any possessive case to Maori. - - In English, it is true, that case may be recognised; because the - ground form undergoes a change to denote it. Even in Hebrew, - something analogous also might be admitted. But in Maori the - possessive case is expressed, like all the other oblique cases, by a - preposition. It may indeed be said, that in the pronouns we find a - possessive formed by inflection. But this might justly be questioned: - for it is very probable that _noku_, and _naku_, are compounds of no - oku and na aku, and, when a native speaks slowly, it may be observed - that he pronounces those words as if so spelt. - -1. What is called the accusative case in Latin is most frequently -denoted by _i_. This particle is different from the preposition _i_, -and is only employed to denote the passing on of the action of the -verb to the noun; e. g., Ko wai hei keri _i_ te mara? _who is to dig -the field?_ (vid. prepositions _i_.) - -2. The vocative case is always denoted by _e_; e. g., E Hone! _O John!_ - -[8] We are aware that _verbal_ nouns should properly have been classed -under _derivative_; but as we shall often have to speak of them as a -distinct class, and as moreover they closely resemble, in some -respects, the participal form of the verb, and are very frequently -used instead of the finite verb itself, we have consulted our -convenience in thus distinguishing them. - -[9] It is true, that we have mentioned (Chap. II. Sec. 6 notes) a few -cases which might seem to warrant such a use. But those clearly belong -to a different class. - - - - -CHAPTER IV. - -OF THE ADJECTIVE. - - -Maori adjectives have no peculiar or appropriate form. They know no -distinction of gender, number, case, or comparison. - -In common with substantives, adjectives admit often of reduplication -to denote _repetition, or many things the same kind_, &c.--vid. ch. 3, -_number_ Sec. 8., e. g. - - Mahi kakata, _a frequent laughing_. - He rakau kikino kau, _they are all bad trees_. - - NOTE.--Comparison in Maori is formed by _periphrasis_, for which - vid. S. - - - - -CHAPTER V. - -OF THE NUMERALS. - - -Numerals in Maori abound in distinctions that are not to be met with -in other languages. - -Tahi, one, has sometimes a form peculiar to itself, being prefixed by -_ko_. All between _tahi_ and _tekau_ may be prefixed by _e_. All the -simple numbers, i. e. all less than _ten_, will, when preceding the -higher numbers, take their ordinary prefixes; e. g. - - E rua, _two_--e rua rau, _two hundred_. - Ka toru, _three_--ka toru nga rau, _three hundred, or it is 300_. - Kia wha, _let it be four_--kia wha mano, _let it be four - thousand &c._ - Ka rima _five_,--ka rima mano, _five thousand, &c._ - Ka rima tekau, _fifty, &c., &c., &c._ - -Numbers between ten and twenty are expressed by ten and unit; e. g. - - E ono, _six_,--tekau ma ono (_ten and six_) _sixteen_. - E whitu, _seven_,--tekau ma whitu, _seventeen_. - -Twenty, and all numbers between twenty and a hundred, may be expressed -in two ways: - -1st, (which is now the more general,) by a _unit_ preceding ten; -e. g., e _ono_ tekau, (_six tens_) _sixty_; ka _iwa_ tekau, _ninety_, -&c. - -2ndly, by _hoko_ prefixed to the _unit_; e. g., hokorua _twenty_. - - NOTE.--The Maori mode of counting has always, heretofore, been by - pairs: thus _hokorua_, twenty, stands for _twenty pair_, i. e. forty, - and so on. When they wish it to be understood singly they postfix - _taki-taki_ to the numeral adjective; e. g., hokorua _taki-taki_, - _twenty_. Sometimes _topu_, or _pu_, is postfixed to make it more - clear that the double of the number is intended; e. g., e waru topu, - (_eight doubled_) _sixteen_. - - Ngahuru, with Ngapuhi, denotes _ten_, and tekau, _eleven_. In this, - the central part of the island, as far as Taupo, ngahuru and tekau - represent both of them _ten_. - -In expressing a sum of _tens_ and _units_, the smaller number follows -ten or its multiple, and is connected with it by the numeral -conjunction _ma_; e. g., _thirty-four_ is denoted by "e toru tekau ma -wha." - -In expressing a sum of _hundreds_, with _tens_ and _units_, the tens -are postfixed to the hundreds without a _ma_ intervening; e. g., 136 -is expressed by "ko tahi rau, e toru tekau, ma ono." - -A sum of _thousands_, _hundreds_, _tens_ and _units_, is expressed in -the same way, the particle _ma_ only intervening between the _ten_ and -the _unit_; e. g., 1136 is expressed by "ko tahi mano, ko tahi rau, e -toru tekau, ma ono." - - NOTE.--It should be here noticed that this is the new mode of - reckoning brought in by Europeans, and now fast spreading over the - land. The old mode is not so convenient in calculation; but it is - often heard; 240 would according to it, be thus expressed; Ko tahi - rau ma rua, lit. _one hundred and two_. Two, here, stands for (twice - ten) twenty doubled. - - 250 would run thus, ko tahi rau ma rua pu tautahi, _one hundred and - two double_, and a tautahi, _an odd one_. - - 4900 would run thus; e rua mano ma wha, hokorima te tuma; _two - thousand, four hundred double, fifty double is the tuma, the excess_. - - For all beyond a thousand there is, we suspect, a considerable - diversity in the nomenclature of different tribes. In Waikato and - Taupo 10,000 double, (i. e., 20,000 according to our reckoning,) - would be a _tini_, ten _tini_, (i. e., 100,000 double) would be - indifferently called _ngera_, _rea_, _hea_. All beyond that would be - denominated by a _tini makehua_, a _tuaururi whaioio_, (_or maioio_) - a _tini whakarere_, _&c._ - -For denoting a number of persons less than _ten_, _toko_ is generally -prefixed to the numeral; e. g., - - tokowhitu tatou, _we are seven in number_. - -For denoting _distribution_ t[=a]taki is prefixed to the numeral; kia -_t[=a]taki_ rua pu nga utu i te tangata, _let each man have four -payments_. - - NOTE.--Tataki prefixed does not always denote distribution; e. g., Ka - tataki-hia nga whakato o ta koutou mara? _How many baskets (are - these) that have been sown in your cultivation?_ - -In measuring length, a fraction is denoted by huka; e. g., - - E ono whatianga, huka to te whitu, _It is six whatiangas[10] long, - not quite seven_. - E waru maro[10], huka to te iwa, _It is eight maro, not quite nine_. - -ORDINALS.--The ordinal numbers are formed: - -1. By _tua_ prefixed to the cardinal; e. g., tua toru, _third_, tua -iwa, _ninth_. - -2. By _whaka_ prefixed; e. g., whakatekau, _tenth_. - -3. By the simple cardinal with the definite article, ko _te wha_ tenei -_o_ aku haerenga mai, _this is the fourth of my comings here_; i. e., -this is the fourth time I have come here. - -[10] _Whatianga_ corresponds to the ancient cubit--_maro_ is what a -man can measure with his extended arms. - - - - -CHAPTER VI. - -OF THE PRONOUNS. - - -The personal pronouns of Maori are as follows: - - SINGULAR. | DUAL. - | - | { Taua, _you and I_. - Ahau, or au, _I_. | { Maua, _he and I_. - Koe, _thou_. | Korua, _you two_. - Ia, _he_. | Raua, _they two_. - - PLURAL. - - { Tatou, _you all and myself_. - { Matou, _they and myself_. - - Koutou, _ye_. - Ratou, _they_. - -The first person dual and plural has, as may be seen in the above -table, two forms, _taua_ and _tatou_, _maua_ and _matou_; the former -class may be denominated _inclusive_, the latter _exclusive_. For -example: - -The speaker of a company, who is addressing a person just come in, -uses _matou_; e tatari ana _matou_ ki a koe, _we are, or have been -waiting for you_. If he means that only himself and another have been -waiting, he uses _maua_, e tatari ana maua kia a koe: but when he -addresses the whole company he uses _tatou_; Tatou ki te kai, _let us -go to dinner_. If however he is addressing only another beside -himself, he uses _taua_; Taua ki te kai, let us (two) go to dinner. -Again, if he says, No _matou_ tenei kainga, he tells you, the hearer, -that he and others possess this farm. If he says, No _maua_ tenei -kainga, he tells you that he and some other person already mentioned -possess it. If however he use _tatou_, No tatou tenei kainga, he means -that all that he is addressing have a share in it. If he says, No taua -tenei kainga, he tells you, the hearer, that it belongs to you and -himself. - - NOTE.--The student will find hereafter that the dual number - is sometimes used for the plural. - - In addressing an individual _ia_ is sometimes used in the second - person by Ngapuhi; e. g., E ia. It is used in a very strange - combination also with _wai_ by some tribes; e. g., - - Ko wai ia? _who said so?_ - -The PERSONAL PRONOUNS admit, in the singular, of _declension_; e. g., - - SINGULAR. - - _Nom._ Ahau or Au, _I_. - _Poss._ Naku, or Noku, _mine_. - _Obj._ Ahau, or Au (preceded by some preposition); e. g., - _Ki_ a au, or, ki ahau, _to me_, - _E_ a hau, or, e au, _by me_, - Maku or Moku, _for me_. - - SINGULAR. - - _Nom._ Koe, _thou_. - _Poss._ Nau or Nou, _thine_. - _Obj._ Koe (preceded by some preposition); e. g., kei a koe, - _with thee_. - Mau and Mou, _for you_. - - SINGULAR. - - _Nom._ Ia, _he_. - _Poss._ Nona, or Nana, _his_ or _hers_. - _Obj._ Ia (preceded by some preposition); e. g., I a ia, _from - him_ or _from her_. - Mona and Mana, _for him_, or _for her_. - -Pronouns, in common with nouns, have no gender. There is no word in -Maori to denote the pronoun _it_ with its dual and plural. Their place -is generally supplied by some artifice of the construction, as will be -shewn in the Syntax. - - -OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. - -As the _possessive_ pronouns are closely connected with the -_personal_, they may be mentioned next. - -They are as follows: - - SINGULAR. | PLURAL. - | - Toku, or t[=a]ku, or t[)a]ku, _my_. | Oku, [=a]ku, or [)a]ku, _my_. - Tou, to, or tau, _thy_. | Ou, o, au, _thy_. - Tona, t[=a]na, or t[)a]na, _his_. | Ona, [=a]na, [)a]na, _his_. - -The other possessive pronouns are formed from the dual and plural of -their respective pronouns by prefixing _o_; e. g., - - o { taua, } _of us two_. | o { tatou, } _our_. - { maua, } | { matou, } - o korua, _of you two_. | o koutou, _your_. - o raua, _of them two_. | o ratou, _their_. - -Such words as _himself_, _his own_, _my own_, &c., are expressed in -Maori by some adverb added in the sentence; e. g., Nona _ake ano_ tona -aroha ki a tatou, _his love to us was his own_; i. e., was -self-derived. - -The adverbs most usually employed for this purpose are _ake_, _ano_, -_noa_, _iho_, _tonu_. - - -RELATIVE PRONOUNS. - -The next in order are the relative pronouns. For these there is no -distinct form in Maori. Sometimes they are wholly omitted in the -sentence; e. g. - - Ko te tangata tenei i patua e Hone, _this is the man that was beaten - by John_. - -At other times their place is supplied by some artifice of the -construction. Vid. S. - - -DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - -The demonstrative pronouns are as follows: _Taua_, _tenei_, _tena_, -_tera_, and their respective plurals, _aua_, _enei_, _ena_, _era_. - -_Tenei_ and _aua_ are used for _that_ and _those_. _Tenei_ is applied -to the object nearest at hand, or to the point of discourse to which -the speaker had last alluded; _tena_ to an object near to, or -connected with, you the person spoken to; _tera_ to an object farther -remote; e. g., - - No Hone tenei ware, _this is John's house_. - No Penehamine tena, _that one near you_. - No Kukutai tera, _that one farther off is Kukutai's_. - -The same distinction is to be observed in the plural number. - - It may be questioned whether tenei and its branches are not, like - _to_, (vid. article) compounded of two words, viz. _te_ and _nei_, - &c. They can always, at least, be resolved into them; e. g., Ho mai - tena mea, _give me that thing_, is the same as ho mai te mea na. - There is, however, a little difference in the uses of these two forms - which the attentive student will discover by observation. - - _Nei_, _na_, and _ra_, are mostly added (like the ci, and la of - French) to point at the object more forcibly. - - When the speaker wishes to denote the object with _familiarity_, - _contempt_, &c., he generally uses the resolved form; e. g., Ka hinga - ahau i te wakatakariri ki _te_ tangata _nei_, _I fall with anger at - the fellow here_. - - Sometimes we meet with nei and its branches twice repeated; e. g., - tenei na, tera ra. - - Nei, &c., are often used in asking questions; e. g., nei na? _Is this - it?_ Ra ra? _Is that it?_ - - NOTE.--The speaker should be careful in speaking not to confound this - demi-pronoun with the interrogative particle _Ne_. - -Sometimes we meet with _ia_ used as a demonstrative, e. g., - - Tona wenua kai ha _ia_, _that is the very land of food_. - - NOTE--_Anei_, and _ara_ are often used by Ngapuhi for _enei_ and - _era_. - - -THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. - -The interrogative pronouns are _wai_, _aha_, _tehea_, and its plural -_ehea_, _kohea_, and sometimes, (particularly in Waikato,) _pehea_. - -_Wai_ is applied (1) to persons, and (2) to animals or things, as -_canoes_, _ships_, &c., to which the name of a man has been given, and -is always the pronoun used in asking the question, What is his name? -It is sometimes applied to _countries_, &c.; but, in such cases -_kohea_ is the pronoun most frequently used. - -The following are examples of the uses of _wai_ and _kohea_: - - Ko wai tena? _Who is that?_ - Na wai tenei? _Whose is this?_ - Ko wai tena kuri? _Who is that dog?_ i. e., what is his name? - Ko wai tena poti? ko Wikitoria, _what boat is that?_ ans. _Victoria_. - Ko wai tona ingoa? _What is his name?_ - Ko wai tena whenua? _What country is that?_ - Kohea tenei? _What place is this?_ - - NOTE.--Wai will sometimes take the plural form by having _ma_ - postfixed; e. g., Ko wai ma ena? _Who are they?_ - -_Aha_ is applied to everything in which _kind_ is denoted; so also is -_pehea_ sometimes: - - EXAMPLES. - - He aha tena mea? _what (insect, animal, or thing) is that?_ - Ko Hone aha? _which John was it?--(was it John the Baptist, or John - the Apostle?)_ - He aha a Erihapeti ki a Hone? _what (relation) is Elizabeth to John?_ - Na te aha? _from what cause? (why?)_ - Pehea ana to whakaaro? _what is your thought?_ i. e., _what do you - think?_ - E taea te pehea? _what can be done? how can it be helped?_ - He kai pehea tena kai? _what kind of food is that?_ - - NOTE.--The above sentence decides the right of _pehea_ to be - considered a pronoun. Most of the compounds however of _hea_; such - as, _kohea_, _pehea_, _nohea_, _ihea_, _mohea_, &c., ought most - probably to be considered as belonging to the class of adverbs. - - The student will find, as we proceed, that the lines of distinction - between the various classes of pronoun, adverb, preposition, noun, - verb and adjective, are frequently but faintly marked, and that the - same word may be often noticed as standing in four or five different - ranks. - -Tehea, and its plural ehea, is applied to _which_ of a number, and is -used to denote _persons_, or _things_; e. g., - - Ko tehea tau e pai ai? _which do you choose?_ - Ko ehea tangata au e ki nei, _which men do you speak of?_ - - NOTE.--Pronouns are sometimes employed to denote the time of the - sentence, as will be seen hereafter. (vid. verbs.) - - -THE DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS. - -_Each_ and _every one_, are expressed by the demonstrative or -possessive pronoun, and the noun twice or thrice repeated; e. g., - - Haria mai e tera tangata, e tera tangata, tana kono riwai, _bring - each man his basket of potatoes_. - Ia tangata ia tangata, _each man_. - I tenei ra i tenei ra, _each day_. - E warea ana ki tana mahi ki tana mahi, _each is engaged with his own - particular business_. - - -THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. - -_Some other_ and _any_, are most frequently denoted by _te tahi_, and -its plural _e tahi_; sometimes also by the preposition _i_; (vid. -prepositions.) - - Kua kite ahau i _e tahi_, _I saw some (of them)_. - Ko _e tahi_ kihai i kitea e ahau, _some I did not see_. - Kahore kau ahau i kite i _te tahi_, _I did not see any at all_. - -_Whatever_, _whatsoever_, &c., are expressed in various ways; as may -be seen in the following examples: - - Ko _nga mea katoa_ e mea ai koutou, _or_ } _whatever ye do_, - Ko _nga aha noa_ &c. &c. } Col. 3, 17. - Ko _ta koutou e inoi ai_ i toku ingoa, _whatever ye ask in my name_. - Kia ho atu ki a ia _tana_ mea _e_ inoi ai ia, _to give her - whatsoever she would ask_, Mat. 14, 7. - Ka kai koutou, ka inu, _ka aha_ ranei, _whether ye eat or drink or - whatever ye do_. 1 Cor. 10, 31. - - - - -CHAPTER VII. - -OF THE VERBS.[11] - - -Sec. 1. CLASSIFICATION.--They may be distributed in - -(a) _Primitive_, i. e., underived from other words; e. g., - - Noho, _to sit_. - Hopu, _to catch_. - -(b) _Derivative_, i. e. such as are derived from words of some other -root; e. g., - - E _kakahu_ ana i tona, _is putting on his garment_. - _I ahatia_ koe? _what was done to you?_ - Penatia, _do it in that manner_. - E hau, _if it blow_. - Narungatia mai, _push it in from above_. - E pai ana, _it is good_. - -This class is by far the most numerous. Under it also may be comprised - -(1) Verbs formed by reduplication; e. g. - - Korerorero, _to hold conversation with, &c._ - -(2) _Compound_ verbs, i. e. verbs formed from two or more words joined -together; e. g. - - _Ma-te-matapihitia_ mai, _give it me by the window_. - Whaka-ngoi-koretia, _made weak_. - - NOTE.--As the same word is very frequently used in Maori as verb, - substantive, adjective, and adverb, it is often impossible to - determine under which of the above classes it should be ranked; - neither, indeed, will it be necessary; as the origin of the verb in - no way affects its grammatical relations. - -Sec.. 2. NUMBER, PERSON, and GENDER.--Maori verbs are not declined by -inflection; i. e. by variation of the ground form; and therefore know -nothing of number, person, and gender. - -Sec.. 3. MOOD and TENSE.--As neither the ground form, nor the auxiliary -particles experience any variation from change of mood, we cannot -recognize any grammatical form for denoting moods in Maori, and shall -not therefore enter any farther into the subject at present. - - NOTE 1.--The only variations we have been able to discover are - - 1st. Those for denoting the imperative mood. - - 2nd. The prefixing of the particle waka to the verb, and thus causing - a Hiphil, or causative, conjugation. The prefixing of a conjunction - cannot, we think, warrant the creation of a distinct form for the - subjunctive mood. - - NOTE 2.--As the business of the grammarian lies principally with the - grammatical form of words, i. e., with those means with which a - language is supplied for expressing the different varieties of - thought, it is clear that no form is to be admitted under any head, - which does not denote a meaning specifically belonging to that head. - Thus, in the case of the Maori moods, we never, (as we sometimes do - in English and other languages,) meet with a variation in _form_ from - the root, either in the case of the verb itself, or its auxiliaries; - and we therefore consider that, _grammatically_ speaking, we have no - form for these moods. - - It is true, that in a _logical_ point of view, i. e., when the - signification alone is considered, a great many varieties both of - mood and tense might be established. But this can never be admitted - as the basis on which a grammar should be constructed; neither can - any maxim be more true than that "equivalence in sense does not imply - similarity in grammatical nature." - -Sec.. 4. TENSE.--Maori abounds in a variety of forms for denoting -modifications of time. They are designated by verbal particles, (vid. -Note,) adverbs, prepositions, pronouns, and the articles _he_ and _te_ -placed in connexion with the verb. The force of these, again, is, in a -large majority of cases, determined by the context, and we believe -ourselves to be correct in saying that there are, in this language, -but few _absolute_ forms for determining _tense_; for example: - - E moe _ana_, _he is sleeping_. - I reira _e_ moe _ana_, _there was he sleeping_, or _there he slept_. - I riri _au_, _I was angry_. - _Mo te aha_ koe _i_ riri mai ai ki a au? _why are you angry with me?_ - _Ka_ haere ahau, _I will go_. - Na _ka_ whaka_tika_ a Hone, _then John rose_. - (See also preposition _mo_:) - - NOTE.--The verbal particles are words which have no meaning in - themselves, but which prefixed to a word, endue it with the qualities - of a verb. They correspond to the auxiliary verbs of English, but do - not admit of the same varieties of applications: neither can they lay - claim to the rank of verb substantive. Thus in Maori we have no - _direct_ form for such phrases as the following, _I am_, _you will_, - &c. - -Sec.. 5. They are as follows: _e_, _ana_, _ha_, _kua_, _i_, _kia_, _hei_, -_me_, _kaua_, _aua_, and _kei_. - -Their uses will be best ascertained by examining the paradigm at the -end of this section. A more full consideration of them and of the -other modes of construction, which are therein contained, will be -deferred to the Syntax. - -As the voice of the verb but little affects its conjugation, we have -not thought it necessary to make any separate head for the different -voices; but have represented all in the one table. - -The student, however, is recommended to read our remarks on the -passive voice before he proceeds to examine into the tenses. - -Sec.. 6. It may be naturally expected that, in an unpolished language -like Maori, there should not be much that is artificial, or -complicated, in the arrangement of tenses. Such we believe to be the -case. It is true that some would contend for as many tenses as may be -found in English; but, independently of the improbability of such a -thing, we believe that a careful investigation will lead the inquirer -to the arrangement which we have adopted; viz. the _present_, the -_past_, and the _future_. - -It is true that other tenses may sometimes be met with which are -accurately defined; but we cannot admit them a distinct place in the -modifications of the simple verb; because such forms are always -compound, or depend, at least, for their meaning upon the construction, -and belong more properly to the syntax than to this part of the -grammar. - -Sec. 7. In examining into the time of a verb, it will often be very -necessary for the student to notice whether the sentence, in which it -is contained, is _simple_, or _compound_; a _simple_ sentence[12] is -that which consists of only one time; e. g. - - _E_ pai _ana_, _it is good_. - Kahore ahau _i_ kite, _I did not see (it)_. - Ko tatou katoa, ano he hipi, _kua_ marara ke, _we all as sheep have - gone astray_. - _Kua_ mate to tatou Kai whakaora i runga i te te ripeka, _our - Saviour died upon the cross_. - -A _compound_ sentence is that in which two times are introduced; e. g. - - Me i reira ahau e pai ana, _if I had_ been _there it would_ have - _been well_. - Akuanei, tae rawa atu, kua mate, _it will come to pass, that, when - I_ have got _there_, he will _be dead_. - Kua mate ahau, e ora ana nga rakau nei, _I shall die before these - sticks decay_. - Me i whakararatatia i mua, _kua_ rarata, tenei, _if it had been - tamed before, it_ would have _been tame now_. - -Of this, however, more hereafter. - -We may here also mention that it will often be very necessary to -notice the circumstances connected with the uttering of a sentence, -i. e. whether it be emphatic; whether it be the answer to a question; -whether a large measure of certainty is designed to be implied, &c., -&c. On these particulars we shall remark in the Syntax. - - As it is quite immaterial with which part of the verb we commence, we - begin with the imperative; simply because our remarks on it will be - rather extended, and 2ndly, because we wish that our illustrations of - that mood should appear in an unbroken line with our examples of the - other parts of the Maori verbs. - -Sec.. 8. The imperative mood of Maori abounds in more minute distinctions -than any other part of the verb. We present them all here; chiefly -because the sentences in which they occur are, for the most part, -_simple_. - -1. The most common form for expressing the _imperative_ of an active -verb is by its _passive_; e. g., - - ACTIVE FORM. IMPERATIVE. - - Patu, _to strike_, Patua, _strike (it)_. - Tua, _to fell_, Tuaina, _fell (it)_. - -For the passive voice, see table under that head. - -2. (a) If the verb be neuter, and in the second person, the simple -ground form is used; e. g., - - Haere, _go_. - Hororo, _make haste_. - Tena, _be prompt, be quick_. - Kati, _be quiet_. - Whetero, _put out your tongue_.[13] - -(b) Occasionally, however, we find the passive form used, when the -meaning of the verb is neuter; e. g. - - Hapainga, _let us start_. - Takiritia, _idem_. - Kokiritia, _dash forward_ (in pursuit, &c.) - Hoea tatou, _let us paddle_. - -Sometimes both active and neuter verbs will take the verbal prefixes -_e_, _kia_, _hei_, _me_, _kaua_, _aua_, _kei_, before them to denote -the imperative. - -(c) _E_ is used sometimes to denote the imperative of active and -neuter verbs. It is chiefly used with the second person singular, -dual, and plural. - -It is never found in the first person singular; but is occasionally -used in the first person dual and plural. We know of no instance in -which it is employed in the third person, and we believe the following -sentence to be incorrect: E aroha mai te Atua ki a tatou, _may God -love us_. - - N.B.--Illustrations of these remarks will be given in the table. - -(d) _Kia_ is capable of being used in all the persons of the -imperative. It is the particle most frequently used with the first -person. In the second, it is chiefly used with verbalized adjectives; -though occasionally it is prefixed to the verb. In the third, it is -used before either adjective or verb, and by its help we may, perhaps, -make the best approximation to a form of the imperative in which Maori -has been heretofore deficient; viz.--the benedictory; as in such -sentences as the following: _God be merciful to you_. - - N.B.--Another way for rendering the above sentence (and one equally - deserving of attention) is by the preposition _ma_; as in the - following; ma te atua koe e atawhai. - - We ourselves much incline to a form which, at first sight, may not - appear very appropriate; viz., kei te atua te atawhai, or tera kei te - atua, &c. Though these forms are apparently _indicative_, yet they - are frequently used in the _imperative_ sense; Kei a koe te whakaaro - mo tena _the consideration for that is with you_, i. e., _you are to - attend to that_; kei a koe te tahi kupu ki a tatou, _a word to us is - with you_, i. e., _give us a word_. Tena ano tetahi taro i a koe ma - taku tamaiti, _give me some bread for my child_. E kite koe i a Hone - tena te tahi paraikete, _if you see John, give me a blanket_, i. e., - _tell John to &c._ - -The dehortative and cautionary particles _kaua_, _aua_, _kei_, belong -strictly to the imperative. - -(e) Under this head we should perhaps also mention the particle _me_. -As it is occasionally heard instead of the real imperative, we shall -give it a place here. It will be observed that it does not take the -passive after it; e. g., - - Me patu te te poaka, - Me hanga te taiepa. - -(f) The only particles the imperative of passive verbs will admit -before it are, _kia_, _kaua_, _aua_, and _kei_. Following is a table -of sentences illustrative of the above remarks. We have preferred -placing them all in one list that the student may more easily catch -the various distinctions. Other forms are given by which the -imperative is sometimes denoted. - - 1st Form. Whakaakona ahau, _teach me_. - - 2nd. Whakatika, _arise_. - Noho atu, _remain away_. - Hoko mai, _come back_. - Noho puku, _sit quiet_. - Tupeke, _jump_. - Pepeke, _draw up your legs_. - - 3rd. E ara, _arise_. - E noho, _sit down_. - Haere koe, e hoki, _go, return_. - E kai, _eat_. - E ngaki taua, _let us two dig (it)_. - - 4th. Tena koe, kia wakamatu ahau, _give it here let me try it_. - Kia kaha, _be strong_. - Kia hohoro, _make haste_. - Kia ara (te pou), _let (the post) be upright_. - Ko tena, kia nekehia atu, _as for that, let it be moved away - (by them)_. - Kia maia tatou, _let us be courageous, &c._ - - 5th. E! kaua ahau e haere ki reira. _Pish! let me not go there._ - Aua e tukua, _do not let it go_. - Kei ngaro, _take care lest it be lost_. - Kei whakarongo atu tatou, _let us not listen, &c._ - - 6th. Ka oti tena, me ngaki a konei e koe, _when that is finished - this place must be dug by you_. - - 7th. Maku etahi, _(give) me some_. - - 8th. Hei konei koutou noho ai, _do you stop here_. - - 9th. Kati te tahae i aku merene, _cease stealing my melons_, - i. e., _do not, &c._ - - 10th. E tae koe, ka tono mai i a Hone, _when you arrive there, - send John here_. - - 11th. Tatou ki te to, _we to drag_, i. e., _let us go to drag - (the canoe.)_ - - 12th. Ko te tangata kua tukua mai, _(before you send the pigs) let - the messenger be sent here_. - -The attention of the reader is also requested to the following -paradigm of the tenses as classified according to our arrangement. - -He will observe that, as _number_ and _person_ make no difference in -the form, one example of a kind will be sufficient. - -Most of the sentences here inserted are simple. We shall reserve the -consideration of the compound sentences for the Syntax. - - - PRESENT SINGULAR. - - 1 E patu ana ahau, _I am striking_ or _strike_. - 2 E patu ana koe, _you are striking, &c._ - 3 E patu ana ia, _he is striking, &c._ - - DUAL AND PLURAL. - - 1 E patu ana maua, or matou. - 2 E patu ana korua, or koutou. - 3 E patu ana raua, or ratou. - - OTHER FORMS FOR THE PRESENT. - - 1 E kore ahau e pai, _I am not willing_. - 2 Ko au tenei, _here I am_, (lit. this is I). - 3 He tangata kino koe, _you (are) a bad man_. - 4 Ko toku matua ko Kukutai, _Kukutai (is) my father_. - 5 Ka pai, _it is good_. - 6 E haere mai, _she is coming_. - 7 E pai ranei koe? _are you willing?_ - 8 E ki nei (or na) koe, _you affirm_. - 9 Kei te patu, _he is killing (it)_, (lit. at the killing). - 10 Noku tenei wahi, _this place is mine_ (lit. mine this place.) - - PAST TENSE. - - 1 reira ahau i te ata nei, _I (have been) there this morning_. - 2 Ko Rawiri te matua a Horomona, _David (was) the father of Solomon_. - 3 He tangata mohio a Horomona, _Solomon (was) a wise man_. - 4 I haere ano ahau, _I went_. - 5 Nau i wakaatu, _you disclosed_. - 6 Ka haere a Ihu, _Jesus went_. - 7 E ngari a Hone ka kite, _John rather saw it (not I.)_ - 8 Haere ana a Ihu, _Jesus went_. - 9 He ua tena, _that was rain, it rained_ (used chiefly in animated - description.) - 10 He tini aku korerotanga ki a ia, _many (have been) my - conversations with him_. - 11 Ko te tangata kua tukua mai, _the messenger had been sent (before - the other thing was done.)_ - 12 Kihai i pai mai, _he was not pleased_. - 13 Ka te tuku tena wahi, (Ngapuhi) _that place has been given to_, &c. - 14 Kua patua te poaka? _has the pig been killed?_ - 15 Kua oti noa ake taku mahi, _my work has been finished this some - time_. - 16 He mea hanga naku te purutangi, _the handle was made by myself_; - [lit. the handle (was) a thing made of mine, (actively).] - - FUTURE. - - 1 Ka haere ahau, _I will go_. - 2 E riri mai koe? _will you be angry?_ - 3 Maku e patu, _I will kill (it)_ [lit. the killing (it is to - be) for me.] - 4 Ko koe te haere? _are you (the person) that is to go?_ - 5 Tera e mate, _he will die (perhaps)_, (lit. that will die.) - 6 E kore e tukua, _it will not be let go_. - 7 E tae koe ki Waitemata, _When you go to Waitemata_. - 8 Akuanei ko ia kua tae, _the chances are that he will get there - first_; (lit. _presently_ it _is_ he that _has_ arrived.) - 9 Kowai hei tiki? _who is to fetch it?_ - - INFINITIVE MOOD. - - Haere ki te whiu, _go to drive (it)_, (lit. go to the driving.) - Pai kia haere, _willing to go_. - E kore e ahei te tohe, _I cannot press you_; (lit. the pressing - cannot be effected.) - -Sec.. 6. VOICE.--Maori verbs, in respect of voice, may be considered -under the three well known heads of _active_, _passive_ and _neuter_. - -Sec.. 7. The _active_ is the simple root modified by one or more of the -words already mentioned, e. g. e patu ana ahau, _I am striking_. - -Sec.. 8. The _passive_ is the root varied in its termination; e. g. e -patua ana ahau, _I am struck_. - - NOTE.--The student will find, as we proceed, that the Maori passive - differs in some respects from that of the English, Latin and Greek. - -Sec.. 9. The _neuter_ expresses being, or a state or condition of being; -when the agent and the object acted upon coincide, and the event is -properly neither action nor passion, but rather something between -both: as _I am_, _I sleep_, _I walk_."[14] - - NOTE.--Verbs derived from the simple adjective will generally rank - under the head of neuter. Under this class also do we reduce a - species of verbs in the arrangement of which we have felt some - difficulty; viz.--such words as, pakaru, _broken_; marere, - _conceded_, &c., _i. e._, words which are neuter in form, but passive - in meaning; which correspond in meaning to the past participle - passive of the European languages, but are not traceable to any root. - After much consideration we are inclined to think that they may most - satisfactorily be regarded as adjectives, and classified accordingly: - thus, in the following sentence, "kua pakaru te waka i te ngaru," - _the canoe has been broken by the waves_, we should regard _pakaru_ - as an adjective, or rather a verbalized adjective, just as much as we - should kino in the following, "kua _kino_ te waka i te paru," _the - canoe is bad, or uncomfortable, through the filth_. - - To any who wishes to regard such a class as passive participles, we - would reply, that the preposition _i_, (not _e_,) following them - clearly determines them as belonging to the neuter family; and that - though their meaning may not coincide with our definition of a neuter - verb, yet we feel no difficulty on that head; for we only act in - common with other grammarians, who have laid it down as a useful rule - "_a potiori nomen fit_." - - As it may be useful to the student to be acquainted with this class - of words we will supply a table of some of the principal, after we - have made some farther observations on the voices.[15] - -In the passive we meet with variation in the termination of the -ground-form. - - Sec. 10. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. - - A, _to drive away_, &c. A_ia_. - Ka, (v.n.) _to light_ (_as a Ka_ngia_. - fire_) - Maka, _to throw away_, Mak[=a]. - Wakama, _to make clean_. Wakama_kia_. - Hura, _to expose_ (_by taking off Hura_hia_, or Hura_ngia_. - the cover_) - Whakateka, _to denounce as false_, Wakateka_ina_. - Aroha, _to love_, Aroha_ina_ or Aroha_tia_. - Tua, _to fell_ (_as a tree_,) Tua_ina_, or Tua_kina_. - Raranga, _to knit_ (_a native Ranga_hia_. - basket_, &c.) - { Mea_tia_. - Mea, _to do_, { Meinga. - { Meingatia (Ngapuhi). - He, (part. adj.) _unacquainted He_ngia_. - with_, &c. - Kukume, _to pull_, Kume_a_. - Rere, (v.n.) _sail as a boat_, { Rei_a_. - and _to flow as water_, { Rere_ngia_. - Whakatete, _to milk_, Wakatete_kia_. - Paihere, _to bind in bundles_, Paihere_tia_, - Ope, _to gather_ &c. (_in Ope_hia_. - handfuls_,) - Whakapae, _besige_, or _to accuse Whakapae_a_. - falsely_, - { Whakaae_ngia_, - Whakaae, _assent to_, { or - { Whakaae_tia_. - Hi, _to fish with a hook_, Hi_a_. - Ririringi, (v.a.) _to spill_, { Ringi_tia_. - { Ringi_hia_. - Whaki, _to confess_, Whaki_na_. - Arahi, _to guide_, Arahi_na_. - Whawhaki, _to gather_ (_as Whaki_ia_. - grapes_, &c.) - Kikini, _to pinch_, Kini_tia_. - Whangai, _to feed_, { Whangai_a_. - { Whangai_nga_. - Pupuhi, _to fire_ (_a gun_), or Puhi_a_. - _to blow with the mouth_, - Pai, (adj.) _good_, Pai_ngia_. - Ho-mai, } _to give_, { Ho-mai. - Ho-atu, } { Ho-atu. - Waiho, _leave_, Waiho. - Ko, _to dig_, { Ke_ia_. - { Ko_ngia_. - Mono, _to calk_, Mono_a_. - Aro, _to regard with favour_, Aro_agia_. - Horo, (part. adj.) _tumble down, Horo_ngia_. - as a land-slip_, - Horo, _to swallow_, Horo_mia_. - Whakato, _to sow, or plant_, { Wakato_kia_. - { Wakato_ngia_. - Takoto, (v.n.) _to lie_, Takoto_ria_. - Manako, (_same as aro_) Manako_hia_. - Toko, _to propel by poles_, Toko_na_. - Rongo, _to hear_, Rango_na_. - Whawhao, _to stow_, { Whao_whina_. - { Whao_a_. - Utuutu, _to draw water_, Utu_hia_. - Utu, _to pay_, Utu_a_. - Ruku, (v.n.) _to dive_, Ruku_hia_. - Tu, (v.n.) _to stand_, Tu_ria_. - Whakau, _to kindle_, Whakau_ngia_. - Hohou, _to bind fencing_, &c. Houh_ia_. - Whawhau, (Waikato) _idem_ Whau_whia_. - Maumau, (part. a.) _wasted_, Maumau_ria_. - Tatau, _to fight against_, Tau_ria_. - Hahau, _to seek_, Hahau_ria_. - Whakahou, _to make new_, Whakahou_tia_. - Mate-nui, _much coveted_, Mate-nui_tia_. - Tangata-whenua, _a denizen_, Tangata-whenua_tia_, _to be - naturalized_. - -(a) It will be seen that the above arrangement is made according to -the final letter of the ground form, and that each division contains -some examples of reduplicated words, and of words ending in diphthongs. - -(b) That, in words ending in _a_, the passive is mostly made by adding -to the last syllable _ia_, _ngia_, _kia_, _hia_, _ina_, _atia_, _kina_. - -(c) That some verbs receive no additions to the last syllable; as -_maka_, and that the active and passive are, in those cases, alike. On -the Eastern coast _ia_ takes the place of simple _a_ in the passive; -e. g. maka, makaia. - - The speaker should be always careful, in pronouncing passive _a_ to - throw the emphasis strongly on the last syllable. The following words - are of this description: panga, _to throw away_; pana, _to shove - away, &c._; kanga, _to curse_; wakamana, _to ratify, &c._; taunaha, - _to bespeak_; taka, _to fall from a height_; unga, _to send_; waha, - _to carry on the back_. - -(d) That some verbs have sometimes two or more terminations for the -passive; as arohatia, arohaina, arohangia. We may here remark that -some words have different passives in different districts; e. g. - - Whangainga (Ngapuhi), Whangaia (Waikato.) - -(e) That in words, one or more of the syllables of which are repeated, -the reduplication will very frequently be dropped in the passive; e. g. - - Kikini, kinitia; tapatapahi tapahia, &c. - - NOTE.--It must however be noticed that there are many exceptions to - this rule, and that the omitting or retaining the reduplication is - often left to the option of the speaker. In those instances, however, - in which he wishes to denote with peculiar emphasis the - _distribution_, _repetition_, &c., implied by the reduplication, he - always, as far as he can, retains it; e. g. - - Titititia, _strike every one of the nails_. - Patupatua, _strike with many blows_, &c. - -(f) In a few instances we meet with a passive formed by a change of -the first syllable; e. g. - - Rongo, _to hear_; rangona (_passive_); wakarongo, wakarangona - (_passive_). - -Examples of this rule are very few. - -(g) Of the passives of compound verbs, two examples are given at the -end of the table. The rule for their formation is the same as that for -the passives of simple verbs: the final letters, in both cases, being -the only thing on which they depend. Occasionally, however, we meet -with a word resolved into two parts, and each part put into the -passive voice; e. g., - - Kaihau, (v. act.) _to sell the property of an individual without - giving him any part of the payment_, Kai_nga_-hau_tia_, (passive). - -There is another form similar to the preceding, which requires to be -mentioned here; viz., when two verbs follow each other in immediate -succession, one of which acts as a kind of adverb, or qualifying word, -to the other, they will both sympathize with each other in voice; will -either be both active or both passive; e. g., - - Toia haeretia, _dragged along_; lit. _dragged gone_. - Tukua whakareretia, _let down with a dash_. - Kai moe, _eat sleeping_, i. e., _while he is eating he is sleeping_. - -In such phrases the latter of the two verbs will generally take _tia_ -for its passive form. - -(h) Occasionally a passive word may be met with which has no active; -as _parangia_ e te moe, _oppressed by sleep_; _rokohina_ and -_rokohanga_, _waiho_, _homai_ and _hoatu_. - -(i) Passive verbs are used in a more extended sense in Maori, than -what is commonly met with in other languages, not excepting, perhaps, -even the three passives of Hebrew. - -The following are a few illustrations of the various uses:-- - - Haere, _to go_, v.n., te huarahi i _haerea e ia_, _the road by which - he travelled_. - Neke, _move away (yourself)_ v.n., nekehia atu, imp. _move (the - thing) away_, kua nekehia, _was moved away_. - Titore, _diffissus_, part. adj., Titorehia, imp., _Diffinde_, adj. - Oioi, _contremo_, or _nuto_, v.n. oioia, imp., _agita_, v.a. - Riri, _angry_, riria, _angered_; (e. g., ka riria ahau e ia.) - Pai, _good_, kia pai, _let it (the thing) be good_. - Waka_pai_a, imp., _put it (the place &c.) to rights_. - Waka_pai_ngia, _to be accepted or approved of_. - Korero, _to speak_, korerotia, _made the subject of conversation_. - Whakaaro, v.n., _to think_; whakaarohia, imp., _think (of the - thing)_; whakaarohia iho, _think (of yourself, &c._) - Kau, _swim_, v.n., ka kauria (te awa,) _is swum over (the stream)_; - ka wakakauria (te hoiho), _(the horse) is made to swim over_. - Kakahu, _a garment_, kakahuria (tou,) _put on your (garment,)_ - wakakahuria, (te tamaiti) _put on the child's clothes_. - Whangai, _to feed_, whangaia ma te ngohi, _given as food for the - fishes_. - Tae, _to arrive at (a place)_, ka taea Waitoke, _Waitoke has been - arrived at_. - Taea noatia tenei ra, _until it is arrived (at_ i. e. _up to) this - day_. - Huri, _to turn a (grindstone &c.)_, kia hurihia taku toki, _that my - axe may be turned_, i. e. _ground_. - Whawhao, _to stow or put into a basket &c._ - Kua whaowhina te kete ki te tupeka, _the basket was stowed (with) - tobacco_, i. e. _had tobacco put into it_. - Manene, _to beg_, kei manenetia koe ki te tupeka, _lest you should - be begged for tobacco_, i. e. _lest tobacco should be begged from - you_. - Horihori, _to tell falsehoods_; ko te mea i horihoria e koe he - tangata, _the thing you erroneously said was a man_, ko te mea i - whakahorihoria e koe, _the thing you denounced as false_. - -For further remarks on this part of the Maori verb, vid. S. - - (k) NOTE.--The student will sometimes find that the simple root is - used with a similar variation of meaning; e. g. - - Waha, _to carry on the back_; e waha, _get on my back_. - He paipa hei puru mo taku tupeka, _a pipe to plug my tobacco: - into which to plug my tobacco_. - Te waka e to na, _the canoe that is dragged up there_. - Te rakau e pou na, _the stake that is fixed there_. - Kei tehea whare nga tangata? Kei te whare e ngiha mai na, _In - which house are the people? In the house that burns_; i. e. _in - the house in which the lights burn_. - Kei te _tao_ te kai, _food is being cooked (in the oven.)_ - - Sentences, however, like the last of these are mostly employed when - emphasis and brevity are desired more than accuracy. - -Sec.. 12. The verbal nouns also (for which vid. chap. 3 Sec.. c.) experience -considerable variations in meaning. They are in most cases formed from -the passive voice of the root; and as the rules for their formation -may be easily learned by comparing a few with their respective ground -forms, it may perhaps be sufficient to give the nouns derived from the -verbs of the last mentioned table: - - PASSIVE NOUNS. VERBAL NOUNS. - A_ia_, A_nga_. - Ka_ngia_, K[=a]_nga_. - Mak[=a], Mak_anga_. - Wakama_kia_, Wakama_kanga_. - Hura_hia_, Hura_hanga_. - Wakateka_ina_, Wakateka_nga_. - Aroha_tia_, Aroha_tanga_. - Tua_kina_, Tua_kanga_. - Mea_tia_, Mea_tanga_. - He_ngia_, He_anga_, or He_nga_. - Kume_a_, Kume_nga_. - Rere_ngia_, R[=e]nga. - Paihere_tia_, Paihere_tanga_. - Hi_a_, Hi_anga_. - Ringi_hia_, Ringi_hanga_. - Whaki_na_, Whaki_nga_. - Kini_tia_, Kini_tanga_. - Whangai_a_, Whangai_nga_. - Homai, Homai_tanga_. - Waiho, Waiho_tanga_. - Ko_ia_, Ko_anga_. - Horo, Horo_nga_. - Horo_mia_, Horo_manga_. - R_a_ngo_na_, R_o_ngo_nga_. - Whao_whina_, Whao_whanga_. - Utu_hia_, Utu_hanga_. - Ruku_hia_, Ruku_hanga_. - Hou_hia_, Hou_hanga_. - Tau_ria_, Tatau_ranga_. - Hou_tia_, Hou_tanga_. - - Sometimes where it is desirable to make a distinction, on account of - the greatness of the difference between the two branches of the same - root, a different form will be adopted for each meaning; e. g. - - Wanaunga, _is a relation_: wanautanga, _a birth_: Kiteanga is the - opportunity in which a thing may be seen; kitenga generally - denotes _the act of seeing_. Again, wah_anga_ is a _carrying on - the back_, wah_inga_ a _breaking_. - -Sec.. 13. _Neuter verbs._--On these but few remarks are required. For the -distinction between the preposition _i_, by which they are followed, -and the particle _i_, which follows active verbs, vid. _i_ -(prepositions, Sec.. 10, note.) - -That they sometimes take the passive form may be seen in the -illustrations of the passive voice. In some cases also their passives -change their nature, and become similar in meaning to the passives of -active verbs; e. g. - - Nohoia tou kainga, _dwell, or occupy, your farm_. - Ka hengia mai ahau e ia, _I shall be (literally) ignored by him_. - -Sec.. 14. As the participial adjectives may be most conveniently classed -under this head, we shall insert here a table of the principal of -them:-- - - Ea, _paid for_. - He, _unacquainted with_. - Hoha, _wearied at_. - Horo, _stormed_ (as a fort, &c.) - Mahora, _given_ (as a feast.) - Makini, _gapped_. - Mana, _ratified_, &c. - Mao, _ceased_ (as rain.) - Maoa, _cooked_ (as food.) - Marere, _fallen to the ground, &c._ - Maringi, _spilt_. - Maru, _bruised, beaten, &c._ - Matau, (sometimes with Ngapuhi;) e. g., Pakore e matau i a au, - _understood_. - Mate, _dead_. - Mau, _caught_. - Mawheto, _loosed_ (as a knot.) - Mimiti, _dried up_. - Moti, _destroyed, &c._, (corresponding to the phrase _clean sweep_; - Waikato.) - Motu, _cut_. - Mutu, _ended_. - Oti, _finished_. - Ongeonge, (same as Hoha.) - Pahure, _passed by_. - Pahemo, idem. - Pakaru, _broken_. N.B.,--P[=a]karu, _is active_. - Pareho, _consumed_. - Pau, idem. - Riro, _departed_. - Rite, _completus, perfectus, (sometimes.)_ - Riwha, _gapped_. - Tahuri, _overturned_. - Toremi, _sunk into_ (as into a bog, &c.) - Tu, _wounded, &c._ - Whanau, used sometimes as v.n., _bring forth_; sometimes as part. - adj., _brought forth_ or _born_. - Whara, _hurt_ (by accident.) - Wera, _burnt_. - Ngaro, _lost, destroyed, &c._ - Ngenge, _tired_. - Ngonga, _beaten_ (same as Maru.) - -Sec.. 15. That we are correct in denominating such words, as the above, -"participial adjectives," will appear from the consideration that they -will assume the form of an adjective, or participle, according to the -nature of the word by which they may be translated: thus _marie_ may -be translated _quiet_, and be considered an adjective; or _pacified_, -and be considered a participle. Neither indeed will it appear strange -that an adjective should be found, in one language, exactly -corresponding to a participle in another, if we only reflect on the -origin of the following adjectives of the English; _exact_, -_competent_, _complete_, _perfect_, _correspondent_, _&c._, _&c._ - -Like adjectives, these words will assume the form of a verb, when in -connexion with the verbal participles. Indeed, (as we have already -observed,) our impression is, that, the more we examine, the more -shall we be led to think that a genuine verb is by no means a common -thing in Maori; and that substantives, adjectives, and other classes, -are the fountains to which most of the verbs of the language may be -traced. - -[11] There are many things connected with this subject that will, no -doubt, often appear strange to the European reader; and he will -frequently have to be careful lest he be misled by theories derived -from occidental grammars. In those languages the verb is a leading -word in the sentence, and by it exclusively is the office of -affirmation or predication performed. - -In Maori, on the contrary, a pure genuine verb is by no means of -frequent occurrence: almost any word denoting a thing, or quality, is -capable of sustaining that office; and predication is as frequently -implied as expressed. In considering, therefore, the Maori verbs, we -shall have to examine, not only those words which have been invested -with the properties belonging to that class; but also those forms in -which no mark of predication is expressed. The term predication we -have adopted, for want of better, to denote those functions which are -peculiar to the verb, and which are sometimes described by grammarians -under the terms "affirmation" and "assertion." - -[12] We have adopted the term "sentence" in preference to -"proposition," lest the student should be led into perplexity by -conceiving that we used the terms _simple_ and _compound_ in the same -senses as those in which they are used by logicians. - -From our examples he will see that we should call a sentence simple, -even though the subject and predicate be complex terms. - -By noticing whether, when the sentence is translated, one or two verbs -are introduced, and whether either of them is dependent in time on the -other, the student will easily make the distinction that we are -desirous of establishing. The importance of this distinction will be -seen in our examples of a compound sentence. For, in the first -_e-ana_, which is present in a simple sentence, is now past; in the -second, _kua_ is future, though it strictly belongs to the past tense; -in the fourth example this same particle stands for the pluperfect -potential. - -[13] We may here mention that, in speaking of actions done by members -of the body, Maori never supposes the individual, but rather the -member, to perform the act. Thus, such expressions as "lift up your -head," "open your mouth," "stretch out your leg," would not be -rendered, as we have heard some speakers express it, by "huaia ake to -matenga," "hamamatia to waha, &c.," but rather "kia ara ake to -matenga," "hamama tou waha," "wharoro tou waewae." - -We have, indeed, occasionally heard a native say, wheterongia, -(whaterongia, Ngapuhi) tou arero, titahangia; but these phrases are -very rare. - -[14] Lowth. - -[15] N.B.--When we have occasion to speak of this class of words by -themselves, as distinct from neuter verbs, we shall denominate them -_participial adjectives_. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. - -OF THE PREPOSITIONS. - - -Scarcely any part of Maori is more worthy of attention than the -prepositions. In no language, that we are acquainted with, are their -powers so extensive. While, in common with those of English and -Hebrew, they serve to express those relations, which in some languages -are chiefly marked by the different endings of the nouns, they extend -their influence still farther, and are, in many instances, of material -importance in determining the time of the sentence in which they are -placed. - -They are simple and compound. The simple are those which, in -construction, take no other preposition into union with them. The -principal prepositions of this class are as follows: - - E, _by_. - I, _by_, _with_, _from_, _to_, _through_, _in_, _at_, _than_. - Ki, _with_, _to_, _for_, _at_, _according to_, _in_. - Kei, _at_. - No, _of_, _from_. - Na, _of_, _by_, _through_. - Mo, _for_ (or _because of_), _for_ (possession), - _at_ &c., &c. - Ma, _for_, _by_, _concerning_. - Hei, _at_, _for_. - O, _of_. - A, _at_. - Ko, _at_. - To, _up to_. - -The compound prepositions are those which, like the _composite_ of -Hebrew, require one or more of the simple to set forth their meaning. -They are as follows: - - Runga, _upon or above_. - Raro, _beneath_. - Mua, _before_. - Muri, _behind_. - Roto, or ro, _inside_. - Waho, _outside_. - Tua, _other side_. - Pahaki, _other side_, or _this side of_, (used in describing the - position of an object.) - Tai, idem. - Waenga, _midst of_. - Tata, _near_. - Tawhiti, _far off_. - -The meaning and uses, however, of the above, both _simple_, and -_compound_, are exceedingly various; and the attention of the student -is therefore requested to the following notices respecting them.[16] - -E, _by_ (applied to the _agent_, not the _instrument_) is always -prefixed to the agent when a passive verb precedes; e. g., - - Kua kainga _e_ te kuri, _was devoured by the dog_. - Kua kitea _e_ Hone, _was seen by John_. - Kua patua te ngaru _e_ te ua, _the waves were beaten down by the - rain_. - -When neuter[17] verbs assume the passive form the agent follows, as in -regular transitive verbs, and is preceded by _e_; e. g. - - Katahi ano a kona ka takotoria _e_ te tupeka, _now for the first - time has that place been laid upon by tobacco_--now for the first - time has tobacco lain there. - Kangia _e_ te ahi, _kindled upon by the fire_, i. e. having a fire - kindled (there). - -Verbal nouns, and verbs preceded by such words as _hohoro_, _oti_, -_ahei_, _hei_, _pau_, _taea_, _taihoa_, _taria_, &c., will take _e_ -after them; e. g. - - Ngaunga _e_ te ra, _a scorching by the sun_. - Kua _oti_ te patu _e_ au, _the killing has been finished by me_; - i. e. I have killed (it). - E kore e _ahei_ te hapai _e_ ahau, _the lifting cannot be - accomplished by me_, i. e., I cannot lift (it). - -The following, also, are instances in which _e_ is found after the -active verb--after a verb, at least, active in _form_. - - _Me_ wero _e_ koe, _you must stab it_. - _Me_ wewete _e_ ia, _he must let it go_. - He _mea hanga_ e to ringaringa, _a thing made by the hand_. - _Ka te_ arai mai i taku ahi _e_ koe, (a Waikatocism), _(see!) you - exclude the fire from me_. - -I, BY, (follows a neuter verb, no matter whether the agent be animate -or inanimate): - - Kua mate i a Hone, _killed by John_. - Pakaru i te hau, _broken by the wind_. - Ka mate ahau i te wai, _I am dead by water_, i. e., I am thirsty. - -2. WITH. - - Kia haere atu ahau i a koe? _Shall I go with you?_ - Ka riro mai i a au, _will depart with me_, i. e., I shall take, or - obtain it. - - NOTE.--In this latter sentence foreigners often make mistakes, and - render it, ka riro mai _ki_ a au. Wherever _obtaining_, _receiving_, - _taking_, for possession, or such like, is intended, _i_ mostly - signifies the _person_, _ki_ the _place_; as in the following - examples: - - Ka riro to kotiro _i_ te Kainga maori, _your servant girl will be - taken away by (the people) of the native place_. - Ka riro to kotiro _ki_ te kainga maori, _your servant girl will go - to the native place_. - -If the following passage were properly and correctly translated, how -different would its meaning be from that intended by the speaker! kia -riro atu ratou i te hunga nanakia, _rescue them out from the cruel -people_. The true meaning of the passage, as it stands, is, _Let them -depart into the power of the cruel_. - -3. FROM, - - _I_hea koe? _From whence do you (come)?_ - Ki tetahi rongoa _i_ a Hone, _for some medicine from John_. - Inoia he ngakau hou _i_ a Ia, _pray for a new heart from him_. - - NOTE.--For the difference between _i_ and _no_ see the latter - proposition Sec. 4. Under this head may be mentioned a _partitive sense_ - in which _i_ is sometimes taken; e. g., - - Tangohia _i_ [=a] Hone, _take some of John's_. - -4. TO, (denoting possession, used somewhat similarly to the dative we -find in Latin when _sum_ is used for _habeo_;) e. g., - - _I_ a au tenei kainga, _this is my farm (or possession)_. - Kahore he maripi i a au, _there is no knife to me; I have no knife_. - - NOTE.--Beginners are often misled by natives and each other in the - use of this preposition. Such sentences as the following are - incorrect, _I_ a koe haere, _go thou_, _I_ a koe korero, _you said_. - It should be, Haere koe; and, nau i korero. - -5. THROUGH, (or in consequence of), - - E kore e tae mai nga raupo _i_ te ua, _the raupo cannot be brought - here in consequence of the rain_. - -6. IN, or AT. - - To tatou matua _i_ te rangi, _our Father in Heaven_. - _I_ hea tenei e takoto ana? _Where has this been lying? In the - cupboard._ - E aha ana kae _i_ kona? _What are you doing there?_ - -7. AT, (past time), - - _I_ te aonga ake o te ra ka haere mai matou, _on the next day we - came here_. - -8. AT, (future), - - _I_ te ra horoi whare ka haere ake koe ki a matou, _on Saturday you - will come to us_. - -9. THAN, (used in comparison); (vid. S. adjectives), - - E rangi tenei _i_ tena, _this is better than that_. - -10. Under this head may be classed some instances that cannot well be -reduced to any of the above rules: - - E hara koe _i_ te rangatira noku, _you are not my master_. - E hara _i_ a koe, (a kind of jocose phrase corresponding, perhaps, - to that of some in England, _you are a pretty fellow_.) - -The following examples seem to be opposed to rule 1, and are therefore -deserving of notice. They are perhaps confined to Waikato: - - Ka timu te tai _i_ a tatou, _the tide for us (to pull with) will - ebb_. - Haere mai ki te wahi ruru _i_ a koe, _come to the spot sheltered for - you_. - Kei to moe _i_ ona karu, _he is indulging his eyes with sleep_. - -In such instances as these, we should regard _i_ as pleonastic, -somewhat like, perhaps, the prepositions _from_ and _in_ of Hebrew and -Arabic. - -The student should ever be mindful of the distinction between the -preposition _i_ and the particle by which the accusative, (as it would -be called in Latin,) is denoted. This particle has, of itself, no -specific meaning. In many instances its use is similar to that of -_ehth_ in Hebrew; e. g., - - A ka kite te Atua _i_ te maramatanga, _and God saw the light_, - Gen. i. 4. - Kua whakarere ratou _i_ a Ihowa, _they have forsaken_ JEHOVAH. - -It follows an active verb, whereas the preposition follows the neuter, -and signifies _by_. The uses of the two words are totally opposite, as -may be seen in the following example. A young teacher wishing to say, -_sin produces pain_, thus expressed his sentiment: Ko te kino ka -whanau i te mamae. Now, whanau is not an active verb. It is a -participial adjective. It is used correctly in John iii. 8, Whanau i -te Wairua, _born of the Spirit_. The sentence therefore that we have -adduced, if strictly translated, would run thus, _sin is born of, or -produced by pain_. - -KI, WITH, (denotes the instrument); e. g., - - Patua _ki_ te rakau, _beaten with a stick_. - - NOTE.--When used in this sense it very rarely follows neuter verbs; - for example it would not be correct to say, Ka _wera_ i a au _ki_ te - ahi, _it will be burned up by me with fire_. Some passive verb, as - _tahuna_, _&c._ should, in this case precede instead of _wera_. The - following form, however, is correct: - - E kore e ora _ki_ tena, _will not be satisfied with that quantity - (of food)_. - E kore e oti _ki_ tena, _will not be completed_ with _that_. - - Many speakers confound the instrumental character (if we may so - speak) of this preposition with another use of the word _with_, - which, we believe, is seldom denoted by _ki_. - - If, for example, we had to translate into Latin the following - sentence, "to speak with fear;" (i. e. timidly,) how incorrect would - it be to render _fear_ into the ablative that is used for denoting an - instrument! All would see that _dicere metu_ does not express that - meaning, and that _cum metu dicere_, or something to that effect, was - the true rendering. So also here, wherever _appendage_, _connexion_ - and such like is intended, _ki_ is, we believe, a preposition that is - very seldom called into use. We therefore disapprove of such a - sentence as the following: - - Inoi atu _ki_ te ngakau aroha, _pray with a loving heart_. - - It should however be noticed that _ki_ is sometimes found in other - uses of the word _with_, in which no instrumentality is designed; - e. g., - - Taku mahinga ki a koe, _my working with you_; i. e., my work in - your service. - E riri ana ki a koe, _is angry with you_. - - This last example, however, might perhaps be most correctly - translated _at_; as in the following: - - E titiro mai ana ki a koe, _is looking at you_. - - On this use of _ki_ we shall have to remark in the Syntax. - -2. TO, - - Ho mai ki a au, _give it to me_. - Haere _ki_ Manukau, _go to Manukau_. - Te rohe _ki_ a koe, _the boundary to you_; i. e., for or of your - side. - -3. FOR, - - Tetahi _ki_ a koe, _(fetch) a (garment) for yourself_. - -4. AT (past time), - - I tanumia _ki_ reira, _was buried there_. - I maku _ki_ runga _ki_ te poti, _was wet on board the boat_. - -5. AT (future time), - - _Ki_ te mane ka hoe mai, _on the Monday will pull, or paddle, here_. - Kei roa _ki_ reira, _be not long there_. - -6. ACCORDING TO, - - E ai _ki_ tana, _according to what he says_; i. e., as he would have - it, &c. - _Ki_ ta ratou, _ki_ taua taro na, he kikokiko, _according to them, - as concerning that bread, it is flesh_; i. e., they maintain that - that bread is flesh. - - We would here suggest by way of corollary that in quoting the - sentiments of any writer, the most appropriate form for the phrase - "_according to_" would be _ki ta_, as in the above example. Thus _the - gospel according to St. Matthew_ might be well rendered by "ko te - rongo pai _ki ta_ Matiu;" _the rule, according to my opinion_, _is_, - &c., "ko te tikanga, ki taku whakaaro, ko &c." - -It is used also where _if_ would be employed in English: - - _Ki_ te haere ahau, _If I go_. - -Sometimes (in Waikato) it is used pleonastically: - - Kahore _ki te_ matara to haere mai, _it was not such a - distance but he might have come_. - -Frequently, in consequence of the elliptical character of the -language, it is found in various other uses, which it is difficult to -reduce to rule. The following are a few examples: - - E noho ana koe _ki te_ kai mau? _are you staying_ from _food?_ - Te tatau _ki_ a au, _the door to me_; i. e., open the door for or to - me. - Ka riro te waka _ki_ a koe, _the canoe for you will be gone_; i. e., - the canoe that is to take you will, &c. - Heoi ano _ki_ a tame ko te whare, _let the tent be the only thing_ - for _the bull (to carry)_. - Taria e hoe _ki_ a au, _delay your pulling (or paddling) for me_; - i. e., wait for me. - Tikina atu tetahi kete, _ki te_ kete nui, _ki te_ kete hou, _fetch a - basket_, let it _be a large basket_, let it _be a new basket_. - I riri ahau ki reira, _thereupon, or at that thing, was I angry_. - I haere mai ahau _ki a_ koe _ki te_ waka _ki a_ au, _I have come to - you_ for the _canoe_ for me; i. e., to get a loan of your canoe. - - From the above sentence the student will form an idea of how much the - business of language is performed in Maori by prepositions. - -KEI, AT.--It denotes chiefly present time; e. g. - - _Kei_hea? _Kei_ te kainga. _Where is it? At the settlement._ - -2. AT. (future time.) It is not unfrequently found in such -constructions as the following: - - _Kei_ te mane ka haere mai, _on Monday he will come here_. - -3. Sometimes, in animated language, it is used instead of _ko_ before -the nominative case; e. g., - - _Kei_ te ringaringa o Ngakete, aroarohaki kau ana, _the hand of - Ngakete, it was all a quiver_. - -4. Occasionally, in Waikato, it is used in the following construction: -kua riro _kei_ te hoe mai, _he is gone to fetch it (the canoe)_. We -are aware that it has been said that there should be a stop at _riro_, -and that properly the above may be said to consist of two sentences, -as follows: _he is gone, he is fetching it_. We are, however, certain -that many sentences will be heard, in which no stop can be detected in -the native pronunciation. - -5. Sometimes it is used in the sense of _like_: - - _Kei_ te ahi e toro, _like fire that burns_. - Koia ano _kei_ te kowhatu, _exactly as if it were a stone_. - -NO, OF, (the sign of the possessive case.) In this signification _he_ -is the only article that it will admit before it; e. g., - - He wanaunga _no_ Hone, _a relation of John's_. - -The following construction, however, is an exception: - - Katahi ano te potae pai _no_ Hone, _for the first time the good hat - of John's_, i. e., _what an excellent hat is that of John's!_ - - NOTE.--We may here observe that, in denoting the possessive case, - _no_ follows _he_, and _o_ follows _te_, or nga. The following - sentence is incorrect: - - Ano he tamariki _o_ te Atua, _as children of God_. - - The _he_ here requires _no_ after it. We shall have occasion - hereafter (vid. verbs Syntax) to mention an exception to this rule - which is sometimes heard among the tribes to the southward of Waikato. - -2. FROM, (that time), - - _No_ te mane i haere mai ai, _he came here (last) Monday_. - -3. FROM, (that cause), - - _No_ reira i kino ai, _from that cause was he displeased_. - - NOTE.--In all examples of this, and the preceding head, _no_ will - take a past tense after it. - -4. FROM, (that place), - - _No_ Matamata tenei tangata, _this man belongs to Matamata_. - - There is a distinction between this meaning of _no_, and that of _i_, - (vid. _i_. 3.) which is very useful and important. _No_ signifies the - place to which you belong, whether it be England, Rotorua, &c. _I_ - signifies the place you have been visiting as a mere sojourner. - - Thus if we were to ask a person, "_No_ hea koe?" he would most - probably reply, "_No_ Hauraki, _no_ Waikato," or some place of which - he was a denizen; but if we were to ask "_I_ hea koe?" he would then - mention some place he had been just visiting. This distinction does - not seem to be so clearly recognized at the northward as it is in all - the central parts of the island. - -NA, OF, the active form of _no_, (vid. Syntax for the distinction -between _o_ and _a_). - - Na wai tena kuri? _whose is that dog?_ - -2. BY, - - _Na_ Hone i patu, _was beaten by John_. - - NOTE.--Na does not in this sense take a passive after it. It is not - quite certain that _na_ does, in such sentences as the above, signify - _by_. The subject will be more fully considered in the Syntax. (vid. - verbs). - - Na, in this sense, always takes _i_ after it. The following sentence - is incorrect: Nana hoki _kua_ tohutohu enei mea, _he also has - appointed these things_. (For _na_ followed by _ka_ vid. _Ma_. 5.) - -3. THROUGH or BY (what cause, instrumentality, &c.) - - _Na_ te aha i mate ai, _from what did he die?_ - -Sometimes, in this use of it, it is followed by a passive voice, with -_ai_. - - _Na_ te aha i pahuatia ai? _for what cause was he plundered?_ - _Na_ te aha i meinga ai? _why was it done?_ - -Sometimes (but rarely) it is followed by an active verb: - - _Na_ te mea i tuhituhi atu ai au, _the reason of my writing (is - because) &c._ - -4. By (place, conveyance. &c). - - _Na_ uta, _by land_. - _Na_ te kaipuke, _by ship_. - _Na_ Hauraki, _(went) by Hauraki_. - - MO.--N.B. _Mo_ and _ma_ seem to be future forms of _no_ and _na_ in - many particulars. - -1. FOR or BECAUSE OF, (followed most frequently by a past tense, even -though the meaning be present); e. g., - - _Mo_ te aha koe i aroha ai ki a te Karaiti? _why do you love Christ?_ - _Mo_ te aha koe i mauahara tonu ai ki a au? _why do you bear a - continual grudge to me?_ - _Mo_ te tutu ki te kura i whakatikia ai, _for disobedience in School - were (they) deprived (of them.)_ - -Sometimes, however, it is followed by other particles: - - _Mo_ te aha _kia_ riri kau? _why should he be angry?_ - _Mo_ te aha koe ka tutu nei kia au? _why are you thus disobedient to - me?_ - -2. FOR, (denoting _appropriation_, _use_, or some action passing on to -the noun or pronoun to which it is prefixed): - - Ho mai _mo_ku, _give to me (for my use)_. - Hei kainga _mo_u, _as a farm for you (or land to reside upon)_. - He patu _mo_ku, _a beating for me_, i. e., to beat me. - He raka _mo_ taku pouaka, _a lock for my box_. - Murua mai _mo_ku, _take it (from them) for me_, i. e., as a thing - for me, for my benefit, use, &c. - -3. FOR (_in exchange_), he utu _mo_ taku mahi. - -Sometimes but rarely it is found in the following construction: - - Me aha te utu mou? _what is the payment for you to be?_ - -4. FOR. - - Whakawateatia he huarahi mo mea ma, _clear a road for our friends_. - -5. AT, (future time), - - _Mo_ amua haere ai, _go at a future period_. - -6. CONCERNING. - - Nga kupu i korerotia ki a koe mo Tipene, _the report that was - related to you concerning Stephen_. - - We have observed _mo_ used by foreigners in sentences in which _for_ - would appear to be pleonastic, as _open the door_ for _me_; _dress - this wound_ for _me_, &c. We have no hesitation however in affirming - that _mo_ is never used in such a construction. - -7. Used with a verbal noun to denote a _preparedness, &c._, for some -future act; e. g. - - _Mo_ nga haererenga ki reira ko era kai, THAT WHEN _I go there, - there may be food (ready for me)_; i. e. I cultivate at that place - that I may have food when I visit it. Vid. S. - -MA. The active form of _mo_. (Vid. S.) It implies always future time. - -1. FOR. - - _Ma_ wai tena kuri? _for whom is that dog?_ - -2. BY or more strictly, _for_, - - _Ma_ Hone e patu, _let it be killed by John_; lit. let the killing - be _for_ John. - -3. BY, (_what means, &c._) - - _Ma_ te whakapono ka ora ai, _by faith shall (we) be saved_. - -4. Sometimes it is used to denote a simple future: - - _Ma_ku e korero, _I will speak (to him.)_ - -5. It is very frequently employed in _hypothetic_ and _contingent_ -propositions; e. g. - - _Ma_ nga Pakeha e tohe, kaua e noho, _If the Europeans press (to - stop with them) do not remain_. - _Ma_u e pai ka haere au, _If you please I will go_. - Haria atu: _ma_na e whakapai, _ma_na e whakakino, _take it (to him): - (it will be) for him to be pleased with it, (it will be) for him - to be displeased (with it)_. - -A very common way of denoting contingency is to associate _ma_ or _na_ -with a personal pronoun, even though the latter have no direct meaning -in the sentence. We give the following sentence in full, that the -reader may better understand our meaning. - - He tangata Atua, ka puta mai ki a ia te kai, ka whiua te tahi ki - tahaki, hei whakahere i tona Atua, _mana_ ka pau i te kuri ranei, - _mana_ ka pau i te poaka ranei. _A man who has a God, if food is - brought to him_ (to the man), _part (of it) is thrown to one side - as an offering to his God, (as chance may have it) it may be eaten - by the dog, or it may be eaten by the pig_. - _Nana_ ka nui te hau, _nana_ ka iti, _even though the wind be - strong, even though it be light, (still does he carry on.)_ - -To this interesting point of Maori criticism we shall return when we -treat on the _tenses_; vid. S. - -6. BY, (with reference to place or conveyance) in the same sense as -_na_; vid. _Na_. 4. - -RA, BY, same as _Ma_ 6; vid. - -HEI, AT,--always future, applied to _place, intention &c._ - - _Hei_ kona tatari, _at that place stop_. - _Hei_ reira korero ai, _there upon speak_. - _Hei_ konei, _be_ (_you_) here;--a farewell. - -2. It is often used to denote _purpose_, _object_, _use_, _&c._, where -in English we should use _as_, _to_, _for_, _instead_, _&c._, e. g. - - Haria etahi kanga _hei_ o mou, _take some corn as viaticum for you_. - _Hei_ aha tena? hei rewa mo te poti; _what is that for? as a mast - for the boat_. - Kowai _hei_ tiki? _who is to fetch (it)?_ - - Sometimes we hear the following: - - Aua _hei_ pena: _do not so_. - -3. Occasionally, but rarely, it is used to denote _frequent action_; -e. g. - - Ko wai _hei_ ruke tonu i nga riwai nei, _who is this that is_ - continually _throwing about the potatoes?_ - - NOTE.--A very strange use of this preposition is to be found in some - parts of the south-eastern coast; as in the following examples:-- - - Haere koe hei rakau, _go fetch a stick_. - Haere koe hei wai, _go fetch water_. - - On the western coast such an address would be a most offensive curse. - -O, OF; e. g. - - Te whare _o_ Hone, _the house of John_. - -A, OF; the active form of _o_; vid. S. - - Te mahi _a_ Hone, _John's work_. - - N.B.--We sometimes meet with _to_ and _ta_; e. g. - - Ko _to_ Hone ware, _John's house_. - - Such words however are clearly composed of _to_ and _o_, or _a_. - -A. (This seems to be different from the article _a_, as also from the -foregoing.) - - AT.--_A_ te mane, _on_, or _at, the Monday_ (we will go,) &c. - -KO. (This seems to be different from the verbal particle _ko_;--vid. -_verbal particles_ Syntax.) - - AT.--_Ko_ reira noho ai, _at that place stop_. - _Ko_ reira korero ai, _then speak_. - -TO, UP TO. The following is the only construction in which we have -heard this preposition. - - _To_ nga hope te wai, _the water is up to the loins_. - Ka _to_ nga uma te wai nei, _the water is up to the breast_. - - N.B.--_To_ almost always takes a plural number after it. - -COMPOUND PREPOSITIONS.--One or two examples will be a sufficient -illustration of all. - -_Runga_ is capable of the following combinations: I runga i, ki runga -ki, ki runga i, ki runga o, no runga no, no runga i, o runga o, kei -runga kei, kei runga i, hei runga i, hei runga hei, mo runga mo, &c., -&c. The first preposition in the combination and the meaning of the -sentence will always determine the last. - -Sometimes the adverbs _ake_ and _iho_, (vid. adverbs,) as also the -particles _atu_ and _mai_, are postfixed to the prepositions to -increase its force; e. g. - - E ngari tena i runga _ake_, _that which is above (it) is better_. - A muri _ake_ nei, _hereafter_. - - A very singular use of _roto_ (or _ro_) may be found in the - neighbourhood of the East Cape: e. g. - - Kei _ro_ whare, _inside the house_. - Kei _ro_ pouaka, _in the box_. - - A similar use of _waenga_ may be found in all parts of the island; -e. g. - - Kei _waenga_ riwai, _in the midst of the potatoe (field.)_ - Kei _waenga_ mara, _in the midst of the cultivation_. - - Its use however does not extend much beyond those instances. - -A very common and elegant use of _runga_ is, when it is employed in -the sense of _amongst_, _on_, or _with_, to denote _concomitancy_, -&c., &c.; as in the following examples: - - I hokona e koe i _runga_ i te he, _you purchased it on a bad title_. - Kei _runga_ tenei i to mahi, _we are now on the work_; i. e., are - busily engaged at work. - E karakia ana i _runga_ i te he, _he worships on sin_; i. e. while - he worships God he practices sin. - - The preceding examples suggest a good approximation to a form of - expression which, we confess, we have been unable to find under the - preposition _ki_; i. e. _with_ noting concomitancy, (vid. _ki_ (1)), - as in the following examples: "Pray with faith;" "love God with your - whole heart." In these sentences we should have no hesitation in - using _runga_. - - A very common form of, we believe, Maori origin, is, - - Kia haere atu te inoi i _runga_ i a te Karaiti, _let the prayer go - forth upon Christ_. - -The other compound prepositions may often be rendered very useful by -giving them, as in the above, a figurative acceptation according with -the nature of the subject. One or two examples will suffice. - -_Tua_ is thus employed: - - He tau ki tua, _a year is on the other side; this day year, what a - long time_ (you intend to be absent)! - He mate kei tua, _misfortune is on the other side_, i. e. _awaits - you_. - Kei tua o te ra tapu nei, _next week_. - -The student should carefully remember that _muri_ and _mua_ do not -exactly correspond with _behind_ and _before_ in English, and that -_tua_ is very frequently employed to denote those words. - -We have heard the following very erroneous expressions from some old -settlers: - - Tutakina to tatau o te aroaro, _shut the door of the front_, i. e. - the front door. - Kei muri i te whare, _behind the house_. - -_Muri_ and _mua_ (as well as the substantive _aroaro_) are chiefly -employed in connexion with living objects. When allusion is made to -the date of events, the student will remember that the prepositions -_a_, _mo_, _mo_, _a_, _hei_, _kei_, _ko_, _hei a_ and _ko a_, denote -future time, and that _no_, _i_, and _o_ will always indicate past -time. - -These prepositions will sometimes take verbal particles into connexion -with them, and may be frequently found in other forms to occupy the -place of verbs, substantives, and adverbs; vid. ch. 1, Sec. 6. (c), ch. -7. Sec. 1. (b), and ch. 9. - -Sometimes we meet with other forms for denoting what would be -represented by a preposition in English. Though their proper place -belongs to the dictionary, we beg the reader's permission to insert a -few here: - - Puta noa i tera taha, _(make its appearance out at the other - side)_;--_through_. - A taea noatia tenei ra, { _arrives on to_ } - or { or } _this day_. - A tae noa ki tenei ra { _till it reaches_ } - A Mangapouri atu ana, _even to Mangapouri_. - I te takiwa, _(in the interval);--between_. - I te ritenga atu, _(in the line or direction of);--ante_ and - _contra--over against_. - Ki tona aroaro, _(to his front);--before_. - I tetahi taha ona i tetahi taha, _(on one side, on one side);--round - about him_. - Ki tera taha, _(to the other side);--across (a stream)_. - -The prefix _whaka_, when in union with a word, will impart the meaning -of _towards_, and change it into an adverb; e. g., - - Kumea whakarunga, _pull upwards_. - Haere whaka tepa, _go towards the pa_. - I hoatu ai e ahau _i whakaaro ki_ tona matua, _I gave it to him in - consideration of his father; (propter.)_ - Kihai ahau i whakaae, i whakaaro hoki ki a Hone; _I did not assent - on account of John_; i. e. _for John's sake_. - - The above form deserves, we think, the notice of our Missionary - brethren as supplying a good approximation to an use of the word - _by_, which we have not been able to find under the preposition _ki_ - or _mo_, viz., when it is used in _adjuration_. If, for example, we - had to translate into prose the following stanza:-- - - _By_ thy birth, and early years; - _By_ thy griefs, and sighs, and tears; - Jesus look with pitying eye. - Hear, and spare us when we cry, - - we should feel very reluctant to use either _ki_ or _mo_. For, in - that case, our Lord's hearing would be represented as a thing _to be_ - accomplished, or purchased by himself _with_ his birth and early - years--a version quite foreign from the original. - - We should therefore prefer something to this effect:--"Whakarongo - mai, tohungia hoki matou, &c., wakamaharatia tou whanautanga, &c.," - or, "kia mahara hoki ki tou whanautanga ki tou taitamarikitanga, &c., - &c." - - Some, perhaps, would prefer--"I whanua nei hoki koe i taitamariki, - &c.;" neither should we object to such a form. All we contend for is, - that _ki_ and _mo_ will not answer, and that they would often, in - such kind of sentences, convey very erroneous doctrines. - Approximation to such a meaning is all we can hope for; and that is - the best which differs least in _sense_ from the original. - -[16] Many of the following remarks belong properly to the Syntax. The -student however will, we trust, find it advantageous to have the whole -subject placed thus, in one connected view before him. - -[17] By neuter verbs, here, are intended also participial adjectives. -(Vid. verbs, note, under head "Neuter.") - - - - -CHAPTER IX. - -OF THE ADVERBS. - - -The adverbs of Maori may be considered under two heads, _primitive_ -and _derivative_. - -The _primitive_ are but few in number. - -The _derivative_ are very numerous, and may be thus ranked: - -1st. Those which require some preposition to exhibit their -application; e. g., - - _Ki_ hea, _no_ reira. - -2ndly. Those which are derived from words of other parts of speech. - -3rdly. Those phrases which supply the place of adverbs. - -The last class is very large, Maori being deficient in the variety of -adverbs; and though, strictly speaking, most of them cannot claim a -place in this chapter, we shall mention them: - -1stly. Because many foreigners are much perplexed from not being -acquainted with them, and - -2ndly. Because, being idiomatic phrases, a knowledge of them is of -great importance to the composition of elegant Maori. - - NOTE 1.--Some of the following adverbs might, it will be seen, have - been easily classified under other heads. It was necessary, however, - to have a classification, and it is not of much consequence under - which head a phrase of equivocal character should be classed. - - NOTE 2.--Some of the adverbial particles are fully considered in the - next chapter. - -Adverbs may be reduced to the following classes:--to those of time, -place, order, quantity, quality, manner, affirmation, negation, -comparison, interrogation, and intensity. - - -ADVERBS OF TIME.[18] - - Aianei, } - Anaianei, } _presently_. - Akuanei, } - Akuaina. } - _Mo_anaianei, _for this present occasion_. - _No_naianei, } _now, just now_. - _I_naianei, } - _I_naianei-nei-ano, _at, or since this present moment_. - Nonai-akenei, _a few minutes_, days, &c., ago. - A moroki noa nei, } - A mohoa noa nei, } - A tae noa ki, } tenei ra (lit. until it is } _down to this - taea noatia, } arrived to this day), } present time_. - A, e noho nei, (Waikato), [lit. down to } - this (time) in which (we) are sitting.] } - Rapua Te Atua i _tona kitenga ai_, karangatia atu _kei_ tata _ana_ - ia, _seek the Lord_ while _he may be found, call_ upon _him_ while - _he is near_. - -_While he may be found_, might also be rendered by _i tona kiteatanga_. - - Ahea? _at what future time?_ - Apopo, _to-morrow_. - A tahi ra, _the day after to-morrow_. - A mua, _hereafter_. - Wawe, } - E kore e taro, _it will not be long_, } _soon_. - E kore e roa, _idem_, } - E kore e wheau, _idem_, } - Tenei ake, _(this afterwards,) by and bye, hereafter_. - Kei taku kitenga i a ia, _when I see him_. - { ake nei, } - Tukua { or } _(leave hence forward,) hereafter_. - { atu, } - Apopo ake nei, _idem_. - A muri ake nei, _henceforth_. - Mo a mua, _at a future period_. - E takato ake nei, _(it lies hereafter,) henceforward_. - A, ake, ake, ake, _for ever_. - Kia mo--ata te maranga, _rise early_; (lit. let the rising be at - dawn.) - Ko reira, _on that occasion, then_ (future.) - Meake, _or perhaps more correctly_ mea ake, _presently, or, was on - the point of_. - Kia mea (ka hoki mai au?) _(shall I return) after a little while_. - Ka mutu, _when finished, by and bye_.[19] - Ka mea, _after a little interval_, idem; e. g., ka mea ka haere - ake, _by and bye you will follow us_. - Nonahea? _since, or at what time (past)?_ - _No_nanahi } _yesterday_. - _I_nanahi } - _No_ } tahi ra, { _the day before yesterday_; (lit. from - _I_ } { or on the other day). - _No_ } tahi ra atu, { _a short time ago_, (lit. from - _I_ } { or on the other day besides, or beyond). - _No_ } mua, _formerly_. - _I_ } - _No_ } nanamata, _a long time ago, or in old times_. - _I_ } - _No_-tua-iho, _time out of mind_. - Inamata (_Waikato_) _immediately, directly_, &c. - E haere ana _tenei_ au, I will go _immediately_. - Penei _i_ nanahi ka tae mai a Hone ma, _it was this time yesterday - when_, &c. - Kia penei apopo ka u, we shall land _about this time to-morrow_. - No } muri, _afterwards_. - I } - Muri { iho } _afterwards_. - { ake } - I } te aonga ake, _next day_. - No } - No te atatu, _early in the morning_. - No reira, _from that time, occasion_, &c. - I tenei ra i tenei ra, (lit. this day, this day), } _continually_. - I te ao i te po, (lit. day and night), } - Tena _ano_, do it _again_. - Ka { turua } waenga, _at midnight_. - { turoto } - _Kahore_ i puta atu te kupu _kua_ whakatika, _I had not spoken_, - (i. e., _immediately_, as soon as I had spoken) _he arose_. - Haere _po_, go _by night_. - Haere _awatea_, go _by day_. - - -OF PLACE. - - Ko hea, (whea Waikato), _whither_. - Hei hea, _at what place_ (future). - _No_ hea, } from what place, _whence_. - _I_ hea, } - _Ki_ ko, _thither_. - _No_ { ko_nei_,[20] } from this (and that) place. - _I_ { ko_na_, & ko_ra_, } - Kei reira te pakaru kei reira te paru: lit., _there the broken place - there the repair, wheresoever it is broken there coat with - raupo_.[20] - Kei waho e noho ana, _he is sitting outside_. - - NOTE 2. _Ki reira_, _no reira_, _hei reira_, &c., correspond, in most - cases, with _ki kona_, _no kona_, _hei kona_, with this difference, - however, that the _na_ and _ra_ follow the rule already noticed. Vide - _tena_, Pronouns. - - Haere iho te tokitoki, haere iho te tahutahu, burn off the felled - timber, and _immediately as soon as_ it has been chopped up, - (lit. go down the chopping, go down the burning). - Ko te tahutahu ko te ko, ko te tahutahu ko te ko, _immediately as - soon as_, &c. - Tokitoki iho, ko atu, _dig it immediately as soon as it is chopped - up_, (lit. chop downwards, dig forwards). - Ora noa, } - Me i kotahi, (lit. if it had been one), } _all but_, &c. - Wahi iti, _a little bit_, } - Whano, } - _He mea tatau a tau_ te utu, the payment is to be a thing - counted per year; i. e. it is to be rented _yearly_. - I tenei tau i tenei tau, _yearly_. - He tau pea mahi atu, he tau pea mahi atu, this (manuring of the - tree) is, perhaps, _a work of every year_, done _yearly_; kei te - hauhake riwai, _tuku iho_ kei te kumara, (we) are now (engaged) at - digging up potatoes, _afterwards_ (we shall be) at the kumara. - Ka maha nga haerenga, _many have been his goings_, i. e., _he has - gone frequently_. - Hoki ake ko aua kupu, hoki ake ko aua kupu, _he repeats the same - words over and over again_, (lit. return up, those very words, - return up, those very words). - Na wai-a, _at length, so it was, it came to pass_. - Tatari noa, a, _waited a long time_. - A oti noa, _until finished_. - Kia tae mai _ra ano_, _until he arrives_. - _Ka tahi_ ano, _now for the first time_. - _Ka tahi_ ano he mea pai, _it is a good thing indeed_. - _Ka tahi_ au ka mea atu, _then I said_. - - -OF ORDER. - - I noho ai, he hau _tetahi_, he kai kore _ka rua_, _(we) remained - away 1st, (because of) the wind; 2ndly, (we) had no food_. - Ka rua aku haerenga, _I have gone twice_, (lit. my goings have been - two.) - _Whakatepea_ te ko, kaua e pokapokaia, _dig in regular progression, - not here and there_, (lit. _ordina fossionem_.) - Me haere wakatepe te korero, _relate the matter in order_, - (lit. the speech must go in order.) - Hurihia _ko roto_, _turn (it) inside out_. - Hurihia _kotuatia_ te papa, _turn the board on the other side, - upside down_. - Matua, (Ngapuhi) _first_; kia matua keria, _let it be first dug_. - Mataati (Waikato) hopukia mataatitia, _caught first_. - Kua huri _koaro_ te tangata wero,[21] _the tangata wero has turned - adversely_. - Ho mai ki _raro_ nei, _give it down here_. - Kei haere ki _tawhiti_, _do not go far_. - Whiua ki _tua_, _throw it to the other side_. - Neke atu ki tahaki, _move to one side_. - Kumea whakarunga, _pull upwards_. - Whakawaho, _outwards_. - Whakaroto, _inwards_. - A, _tae noa ki_ te Pukatea, _even to the Pukatea_. - Haere _iho_, _come down (to me)_. - Piki ake, _climb up (to me)_. - Mak[=a] atu, _thrown away_. - Rukea ake e ahau, _thrown away by me_. - Mak[=a] mai, _throw it here_. - I te tahi taha i te tahi taha, (lit. on } - one side, on one side.) } - A karapoi noa, (lit. until it surrounds) } _round about_. - A porowhawhe noa, id. } - A potaipotai, id. } - _Pehea_ te mataratanga? _how far?_ - A, hea atu ra ano? How far _will you go?_ - A, hea _noa atu_, _one knows not where_. - _Tautauamoa_ rawa tana kai, tana kai, _each man eats_ - separately (i. e., _by himself_.) - Riri _tautauamoa_, _fighting_, each by himself. - Kaua e ururuatia te whangai, _don't feed (the child)_ in - rapid succession, _without any stop_ (tout de suite.) - _Me whakahipahipa_ etahi rangi, (lit. let some days be made uneven,) - i. e., _do it every alternate day, or, at irregular periods_. - Haere _tahi_, _go_ together. - A, te tukunga iho, (_well, the letting down, at_ last, finally,) - _i. e., the issue of such conduct_, &c. - E kore e _roko_ kainga kua ruaki, _he vomits_ immediately, _as soon - as he has eaten (it)_. - I te _oroko_hangaanga o te ao, _when_ first _the world was made_. - _Kati inanahi_ ka haere mai koe, stop yesterday you came here; - i. e., you started _about this time yesterday_. - - -OF QUANTITY. - - Ho mai _kia maha_, _give_ abundantly. - Ho mai _katoa_ mai, _give_ entirely, _or_ wholly. - _Tena hoki_ te tahi taro, _give me_ also, _or_ besides, _some bread_. - Ho mai _kia iti_, _give me (let it be little)_, paululum. - Kia penei, let it be so much. - Poto _rawa_, _consumed_ totally. - Koia ano te pai! _how excellent!_ - Ano! &c., idem. - _Roa poto_ nei ano, (_long short_,) i. e., moderately _long_. - Kahore _atu_, _no other_ besides. - Tikina _atu hoki_, _fetch another_ besides. - I ki mai _ano hoki_ ia, _he said_ moreover. - - -OF QUALITY. - - Haere tupato, _go_ cautiously. - _Kia uaua_ ki te mahi, _be strong to work_, i. e., work - industriously. - _Kia kaha_ te hoe, _pull (the oar) strong_. - Noho _whakaaro kore_, _sit without thought_, i. e., thoughtlessly. - He aha _i aweke ai_ to mahi? _te tuku noa iho te tuku noa iho_, _why - is the work done_ neatly _and not (rather)_ heedlessly, (lit. and - not rather let it down in any way, let it down in any way.) - Haere _wehi_, _go_ fearfully. - Kai _haere_, _go_ eating, i. e., _eat as he walks_. - Tu _tahanga_,[22] _stand_ nakedly, i. e., _naked_. - -- kau, idem. - Haere _noa atu_, _go_ without guide, fear, &c., &c. - Tangohia _huhua koretia iho_, _taken_ without cause, i. e. - causelessly. - _Ohia noa iho_ au ki te patu, _I struck (him)_ unintentionally. - E hara i te mea totika, _not intentionally_. - Patua _maoritia_, _killed_ intentionally, _in the common way_, &c. - -- marietia, _intentionally_ (sometimes). - I tukua whakareretia, _let down_ by a dash, not with care. - _Te kaha_ te tuku, _don't let it down violently_, i. e. do it gently. - Tukua _marietia_, _let it down_ gently, peaceably. - _Kia ata_ tuku, ---- _gently_. - Kahore ano _kia ata_ maoa, _not_ quite _done_, (i. e. in cooking). - _Te ata pai marie_ o te rangi i nanahi! _what an exceedingly fine - day was yesterday!_ - He pupuhi _noa_, _firing_ without an object. - Tu _kau_ ana, _stand_ empty, idle, &c. - _Marie_ ano ahau i haere mai ai i ora ai koe, _I have come_ - fortunately, _by which you were saved_; i. e. I have come _just in - time_ to save you, or, it is well that I came to, &c. - - -OF AFFIRMATION. - -Maori is very well supplied with affirmative and negative particles, -all of which differ by very slight shades of meaning from each other, -and the uses of which will be best learned by practice. - - Ae,[23] _yes_. - Ina, idem. - Aana, idem. - Koia, idem. - Ae ra, idem. - Ae ra hoki, _yes truly_, &c. - Ae ra pea, idem. - Koia ha hoki, idem. - Ae ko, _yes (you are correct)_. - Koia pea, _yes, perhaps_; (sometimes used ironically for a - negative) _yes indeed!_ - - -OF NEGATION. - -Negative adverbs partake of the nature of verbal particles. We have -given some examples of them in chapter vii., (vid. paradigm of the -tenses,) and we shall have occasion also to notice them in the Syntax. - - Hore, _no_; hore rawa, _by no means_. - Kahore, _not_ and _no_. - Kaho, } _no_. - Kao, } - Kihai, _not_. - Kore, idem. - T[=e], idem; t[=e] whakaaro ia, _who did not remember_. - Aua, } - Auaka, } _do not_. - Kaua, } - Kauaka,} - Kei, _do_ not, and _take care lest_, or _lest_. - Aua hoki, (used in some parts of Waikato for) _no, no; not at all_. - E _hara_ koe _i_ te rangatira noku, _you are not my master_. - Kiano, (Ngapuhi) _not yet_. - -Haunga,[24] _not_, (denoting exclusion, or exception); e. g., - - _Haunga_ tena, _not that, (but the other.)_ - Aratakina mai te poaka; _haunga_ te mea purepure, _lead the pig - here_; not _the speckled, (but the other.)_ - Kahore haunga, (Waikato) used sometimes instead of _haunga_. - Aua, } - & } _I do not know_. - Au, } - Meho, (Waikato,) } _not at all_, (used in abrupt replies). - Hori, } - - -OF COMPARISON. - - Meatia, { _peneitia_, _do it_ thus, - or { _penatia_, } _do it in that manner_. - { _peratia_, } - _Penei_, kua ora, _thus, (in that case, if that had been done) he - would have been saved_. - _Koia ano_ tena, _exactly so_. - Me mahi _motuhake_, _work_ separately. - Haere ana ia, _ko tona kotahi_, _he went by himself, - alone_. - Waihoki, _likewise, also_. - _Ano_ kua mate, as though _he were dead_. - Me te mea, &c. (Waikato) idem. - _Koia ano kei_ te wai, exactly as if _it were water_. - Haere _a_ parera, _walk_ like _a duck_.[25] - Kia wakatangata nui, _act manfully_. - Wakatupu tangata, idem. - - -OF INTERROGATION. - -Maori has many particles which indicate interrogation, and which -correspond, in some particulars, with the enclitic particles _ne_ and -_num_ of Latin; e. g., - - E pai ana? _ne?_ _are you inclined?_ are you? - Ine, (Waikato,) differs but little in its use from the above. - -_Ranei_, _ianei_, _iana_, and _iara_, are always incorporated into the -sentence, and generally denote a question, e. g., - - E pai ana _ranei_ koe? - Koia?[26] _Indeed?_ (when used by itself). - Oti, _else_. - Na-te-aha? _why?_ - Me pehea? How _must it be done?_ - -_Ranei_ is very frequently used in the sense of _whether_. - -_Ianei_, _iana_, and _iara_, are sometimes pleonastic in Waikato. - - -OF INTENSITY. - -Pai _rawa_, _tino_ tika, _tino_ pai _rawa_, kino _whakaharahara_, tika -_pu_, he _noa iho_, tini _whakarere_, tika _tonu_; all these adverbs -stand for _very_ or some modification of it; e. g., - - I hoki _rawa_ mai koe ihea? _what is the exact, or last place from - which you have returned?_ - Pokuru _iho_, pokuru _iho_ te namu, densely _clustered the - sandflies_. - Kahore _kau_, _not at all_. - Haere _ra pea_, _go_ now, _I_ say, &c. - Haere _ra_, idem. - - Maori, as might be expected in the language of a rude people, abounds - in adverbs of intensity. We shall have to mention some of these - hereafter, (vid. adjective, comparative degree, Syntax.) They - sometimes elegantly supply the place of verbal particles, as we shall - have occasion to show when we treat on the Syntax of the verbs. - - From the preceding table the student will see that Maori has the - power of increasing its adverbs to any extent, and that the chief - process by which a word may be converted into an adverb, is by - placing it in immediate connexion with the verb or adjective. - - It should, perhaps, be here noticed, 1st, that Maori inclines to this - mode of construction. Thus, where we should say, _the women and the - children must all roll the log_; a native would most probably employ - the adverb; e. g., Huri _tane_ huri _wahine_. Such a mode of - construction, though loose, is, however, concise and emphatic. - - 2ndly. That the adverb, in this case, admits of the same variations - as the verb--admits of number, voice, and the form of the verbal - noun. For this, however, vid. Syntax. - - 3rdly. That another process for the creation of adverbs is by - prefixing _whaka_, or _a_ to the preposition, noun, or adverb. - - 4thly. That the compound prepositions, especially when _time_ and - _place_ are denoted, will very often take the adverbial form.[27] - - 5thly and lastly. It would be a very useful exercise for the student - to examine those sentences, the place of which would be supplied by - an adverb in English, and notice the nature of their construction. - Some, for example, he will find rendered by the verb, some by the - verbal noun, some by the substantive in the possessive case, some by - the pronoun, &c. - - We have dwelt so long upon this subject, that we are unwilling to - occupy his attention any further with it. - -[18] These adverbs of time are arranged according to their times, past -present, and future. For the time of those adverbs which are -compounded with prepositions, vid. the simple prepositions, chapter 8. -The principal compound adverbs are _hea_, _ahea_, _mua_, _muri_, -_amata_, _apopo_, _reira_, _ko_. They are chiefly adverbs of time and -place. As they are of very common use, we shall give examples of their -various combinations. Some of these combinations ought, perhaps, more -properly to be considered as belonging to the class of substantives: - - _A_ hea? - _Ko_ hea? - _No_ hea? - _Na_ hea? - _I_ hea? - _Mo_ hea? - _Ma_ hea? - _Ki_ hea? - _Kei_ hea? - _I_ hea? - _O_ hea? - _Hei_ hea? - _A_ popo. - _Ko_ apopo. - _Mo_ apopo. - _Hei_ apopo. - _A_ mua. - _Ko_ amua. - _Ko_ mua. - _No_ mua. - _Na_ mua. - _I_ mua. - _Mo_ mua. - _Mo_ a mua. - _Ma_ mua. - _Ki_ mua. - _Kei_ mua. - _I_ mua. - _O_ mua. - _Hei_ mua. - _A_ hea? - _Ko_ ahea? - _Hei_ ahea? - _Mo_ ahea? - _No_ nahea? - _I_ nahea? - _A_ muri. - _Ko_ muri. - _No_ muri. - _Na_ muri. - _I_ muri. - _Mo_ muri. - _Ma_ muri. - _Ki_ muri. - _Kei_ muri. - _I_ muri. - _O_ muri. - _Ko_ anaianei. - _Hei_ anaianei. - _Mo_ anaianei. - _I_ naianei. - _O_ naianei. - -_Reira_, _ko_ and _konei_, &c., will take the same combination as -_muri_. It will be observed that some of the above adverbs take _n_ -between them and the preposition. - -[19] _Ka mutu_, and _ka mea_ generally denote future time, and imply a -short interval between the time of speaking and the act. Though the -former _expresses_ an _ending_ of something else, it does not always -_intend_ it; for it is often used when the person addressed is not -engaged at any thing. As there is nothing in Maori corresponding -exactly to the Hebraic mode of phrase which is translated "_it came to -pass_," "_it shall come to pass_," some have adapted _ka mea_ as a -substitute, and in some cases, perhaps, it must stand for want of -better. There are, however, cases in which we think a more correct and -idiomatic form might be adopted; viz.:--a simple _a_, or _nawai a_ or -_tenei ake_, &c. We, for example, should have no scruple in -translating the following sentences "_so it came to pass when all the -men of war were consumed_," &c., nawai a, ka poto nga tangata hapai -patu katoa te mate, &c., "_and it shall come to pass if ye hearken_," -&c., a tenei ake, ki te whakarongo koutou, &c., "_and it came to pass -when he heard_," &c., a, te rongonga o, &c. - -[20] For the difference between _nei_, _na_, and _ra_, vid. pronouns, -page 30. - -[21] The _tangata wero_, is the person who advances to meet a party, -and throws a spear at them. If, in turning to retire, he turns to the -side different from that from which the spear was darted, it is a huri -koaro, and a bad omen. - -[22] _Tahanga_ is only to be found as adverb. - -[23] _Ae_, and _ina_ do not always strictly imply _affirmation_; e. g., -Kahore he kete? He kete ano; _ae ra_, tikina atu. _Is there no -basket? There is a basket; yes, then, go fetch it._ The word _answer_ -in Hebrew, and that corresponding to it in the Greek Testament and -Septuagint, affords, we think, a parallel to this use of _ae_. (vid. -Parkhurst's Greek Lexicon, by Rose.) It is putting a _command_, &c., -into the form of _an assent_ to some previous sentence.--N.B. _Ina_ is -often used to denote _energy_, _certainty_, &c.; e. g., _ina_ ka riri -au, _certainly_, in that case, I will be angry. - -[24] Some, we believe, maintain that the adverb _besides_ should be -always rendered by _haunga_. It is true that, wherever _exclusion_ or -_negation_ is indicated by that word, _haunga_ will generally answer; -e. g., E rua tekau ratou, _haunga_ nga wahine, _they were twenty, -besides (that is not counting) the women_. In the leading sense, -however, of _besides_, viz., that of _moreover_, _addition to_, haunga -will, we are sure, seldom find an use; as in the following examples: -"_Besides_ you know," "nobody thinks so _besides_ yourself," "there is -nothing there _besides_ the box," "_besides_ her he had no child." - -[25] Some foreigners, we observe, give this adverb a more extensive -meaning than we have allowed it. In such phrases, for example, as the -following: "Held by the hand," "built by the hand," &c., they would -say "purutia _a_ ringaringatia," "hanga _a_ ringaringa." We are, -however, decidedly of opinion that such expressions are very rare in -genuine Maori. "Purutia ringaringatia, hanga e te ringa," are, we -consider, in every way preferable. - -[26] _Koia_, when part of an interrogative sentence, is, as far as we -have observed, (although we are aware that some respectable speakers -of Maori have not followed the rule,) almost always used in -_rejoinder_; e. g., I pehea _koia_ ahau? _what then did I say?_ The -speaker here supposes that the hearer had disputed his statement, and -uses _koia_. _Oti_ is used in a somewhat similar construction with the -meaning of _else_, e. g., He aha oti? _what else then is it?_ - -[27] It has been objected by a learned friend that the compound -prepositions are more properly adverbs, and that in such a sentence as -"kei roto i te whare," _i_ is the governing preposition, and _roto_ is -an adverb. With all deference, however, to his very superior critical -abilities, we submit, that if a preposition be "a particle denoting -the relation of one substantive to another" then _roto_ is a -preposition; for it clearly indicates a local relation between _roto_ -(or _i roto_, if you please,) and the thing spoken of. Those who feel -sceptical on this point, we would beg to examine the composite -prepositions of Hebrew. For example, the Hebrew preposition _under_ -(_tahath_) is recognised as a preposition by grammarians, even though -it may require the prepositions _from_ and _to_ in combination with it -to exhibit its meaning. So also, in English, such prepositions as -_according_ to, _out_ at, _out_ of, &c., are not considered as -disfranchised by the supplementary preposition annexed to them. At the -same time it is to be noted, that where there is a break between the -compound preposition and its supplement, then the former must be -considered as an adverb; thus, in the sentence, "Kei raro, kei te -whare," _it is below, it is in the house_; _raro_ is here, as it is in -English, an adverb joined to _is_; the line of connection being broken -by a comma. In such a construction as this, the same preposition that -precedes the compound preposition, (or rather, in this case, the -_adverb_,) must also follow it. - - - - -CHAPTER X. - -OF THE PARTICLES. - - -We have thought it better to devote a separate chapter to the -consideration of the following particles of Maori; first, because -those words, though they strongly partake of the nature of adverbs, -are yet sometimes used as conjunctions; secondly, because we are of -opinion that a distinct consideration of them will be the best way to -impart clear and comprehensive views of their nature. - - An accurate acquaintance with these _epea pteroenta_ "winged words" - of discourse, is in most languages of very difficult attainment: but - in Maori, particularly, do they require our study; that language not - conceding to the verb the same prominent place that it occupies in - other languages, and rather, (as we have already observed,) - transacting the business of predication by pronouns, particles, &c. - - They are mainly used for embellishing, defining, and impressing a - sentence, and may, with the prepositions, be justly denominated the - hinges of Maori. - - To enumerate them all would be an endless task, and perhaps a useless - one: for, in no part of Maori is there so great a discrepancy in the - various districts. The following, we think, are the most general in - use, and most deserving of notice: atu, mai, ake, iho, ai, ano, ra, - koa, u, hoki, kau. - -_Atu_ and _mai_ are, in most respects, exactly opposite; _atu_ -indicates an _emanation forth_ of action from--the latter an -_approach_ or _direction_ towards--the speaker. - - E kore ahau e rongo _atu_, | E kore e rongo _mai_, _will - _I do not hear_ forth. | not hear towards (me or us)_. - | E rangona _mai_ ranei tatou? - | _shall we be heard towards (us)?_ - Tu _atu_, _stand out of my | Kati _mai_ i kona, _stand - way_. | towards me there_. - Tikina _atu_, _go there and | Tikina _mai_, _fetch hence_. - bring here_, i. e., _fetch | - thence_. | - E tatari _atu_ ana matou ki | - a koe, _we are waiting | - forth to you_. | - E kore ahau e kaha _atu_, | Mau _mai_ ano, _for you truly - _I shall not be strong | hither_, i. e., _it is for you - forth_, i. e., _shall not | to strike the first blow_, &c. - be able to take it there_. | - - N.B.--_Atu_ will sometimes lose its peculiar meaning after a verb, - (vid. verbs, S.) It will also occasionally stand for _other_: Tera - atu ano, _that is another_; i. e., there are other besides. - -_Ake_ and _Iho_. The general uses of _ake_ and _iho_ are, of the -former _up_, and of the latter _down_, to the speaker: - - Haere _ake_, _come up (to us)_. - Heke _iho_, _come down (to us)_. - E tu _iho_, _he stands up there_, i. e., _down towards (us)_. - Te mea e ngangautia _ake_, _the thing about which there is that - contention below_, (lit. is contended _up towards_ (us)). - -Sometimes they will stand, the one for _up_, the other for _down_, to -the object of the action; e. g., - - E kore ahau e roa _ake_, _I am not tall enough to reach up (to it)_. - Ho _ake_ ki a ia, _give it up to him_. - Pataia _iho_ te mate, _ask down (to him) his sickness_. - -_Ake_ and _iho_ will sometimes denote _propriety_, _peculiarity_, -_self-existence_, &c.; e. g., - - Maku _ake_ ano, _for myself alone_. - Mona _iho_ ano tena, _that is for himself alone_. - E hara i te toka tu _ake_, _not a rock that has stood of itself_. - -_Ake_ will sometimes signify _the other side_ of the speaker, whether -it be _before_, _behind_, _to one side of_, _above_, _below_, &c.; e. g., -_haere ake_ to a hearer in front will mean come _behind me_: to a -person behind, it will signify come _to my front_. - - N.B.--_Iho_ does not seem to have any corresponding opposite to this - meaning of _ake_. - -Sometimes, also, _ake_ is employed to designate a motion by another -towards some place with which the speaker is in connexion; e. g., - - Ka mea, ka haere _ake_ ki Waitemata, _follow me by and bye to - Waitemata_. - He aha te tikina _ake_ ai he ti ma te turoro nei? _why has not tea - been fetched (from my residence) for this patient?_ - E puta mai, ka karanga _ake_ ki a au, _when he comes you will call - to me, (who am now going away)_. - -Under these two last rules should, perhaps, be mentioned the following -examples: - - Tangohia _ake_ te ngarara i taku tuara, _take the insect off my - back_. - Ma koutou e urunga _ake_, _do you of the bow of the canoe steer_, - i. e., _so paddle that the stern, where I am, may be directed - rightly_. - - NOTE 1.--There are other subordinate meanings of _ake_ and _iho_, of - which examples have been given under the adverbs, and which do not, - we think, require any further notice. - - NOTE 2.--_Ake_ and _iho_ are often used after verbs, in a manner - somewhat corresponding to that of the verbal particles. (vid. - verbs. S.) - -_Ai_ is a particle of great use. It is chiefly employed as a -substitute for the relatives _who_, _which_, _what_, and has reference -to the _time_, _place_, _manner_, _cause_, _means_, _intention_, &c., -of an action; as in the following examples: - - No te ra horoi whare i haere mai _ai_, _started for here on - Saturday_. - I tona kitenga _ai_, _when it was seen_. - Te whare i moe _ai_ ia, _the house in which he slept_. - Te peheatanga i meatia _ai_, _the way in which it was done_. - Te take i patua _ai_, _the cause for which he was beaten_. - Ma te aha e ora _ai_? _by what means be saved?_ - I tuhituhi _ai_ au nau hoki i utu i ena riwai, _I have written to - you because you paid for the other potatoes_. - -Occasionally, however, it is heard as a simple expletive; e. g., - - I mua _ai_, _formerly_. - -2ndly. It is employed with the verbs to denote a _sequence_ and, -occasionally, an _opposition_ of action, and might be translated by -"_and then_," "_to_," and sometimes "_but_." - - Haere, ka hoki mai _ai_, _go, and then return_. - Haere ki reira noho _ai_, _go there to stop_. - Kua hereherea, noho _ai_, kawea atu ana ki a te Paki, _she was - enslaved, and remained such_ for some time, _then was carried to - Paki_. - Ko te pa ano tera; noho _ai_ ia ki Horotiu, _that indeed is his - village; but he dwells at Horotiu_. - - Sometimes, especially at Taupo, and, we understand, at the East Cape, - _ai_ is often used where the _sequence_ or _opposition_ of action is - but faintly, if at all, expressed. The following is correct in - Waikato: E pa, kei hea tetahi wahi mo matou? kokoa kotoatia _ai_ e koe - te whenua nei, _friend where is there a portion for us? why you have - monopolized the whole of the land_. - - NOTE 1.--The place of _ai_ may be often supplied by _nei_, _na_, or - _ra_; e. g., koia ahau i haere mai _nei_. - - NOTE 2.--_Ai_ is often erroneously omitted and erroneously introduced - by foreigners, and those who wish to propound a statement accurately - will do well to observe its use. - - For _ai_, as used in connexion with the verbal particles, and the - verbs. (See Syntax.) - -_Ano._ This is a particle much used in assertions and replies. Its -meaning will vary with that of the word to which it is postfixed. - - _Indeed_; Tenei _ano_ nga tangata o toku kainga te mahi nei i te - kino, Here _truly_ are the people, &c. - Ko ia _ano_ te tikanga o te aroha, _id_ demum _est firma amicitia_. - Naku _ano_ taku, _mine is my own_. - Kati _ano_, _stop I say, (or beg of you)_. - _Also_; No Waikato ahau, no Rotorua _ano_, _I am from Waikato, from - Rotorua also_. - _Only_; Kotahi _ano_ taku, _one only is mine_. (_Anake_ would not - here be used.) - _Immediately_, akuanei _nei ano_, now _instantly_. - _Same_; Ko nga kau _ano_ nga kau, _they are the very same cows_. - _Different_; He tangata _ano_ tena, _that belongs to another person_. - _Again_ or _another_; Tikina _ano_, _fetch another_. - _Same as_; _Ano_ e moe ana, _as if he were sleeping_. - _Self_; Mana _ano_, _for himself_. - I whakaae mai ranei? I whakaae _ano_. Was he willing? He was willing. - -It is used in combination with other particles, as follows: - - Heoi _ano_, _that is all_. - _Ano_ hoki, _also_. - Ra _ano_, _until_. - Nei _ano_, _this is it, or here it is_, &c. - Koia _ano_! _how (fine, &c.)!_ - A, e noho nei _ano_? _and is he still here?_ - _Ano ra_, whakarongo mai, _(yes, or no;) but listen to me_; i. e., - _I do not deny what you say; only listen to me_. - Ko tena _ano_ ra, _that one I say, or that also_. - -_Ano_, in the beginning of sentences, seems with Ngapuhi to admit of a -wider application than what is generally heard in Waikato; e. g., -_Ano_ ka tae ki te whare, _and when he came to the house_. - - N.B.--_No_, also, with the same people, seems to admit of a somewhat - similar application. - -_Ra_ is a particle corresponding in its use with _nei_ and _ra_, and -is frequently used to supply the place of the relative _which_; e. g., - - I kite _ra_ koe, _which you saw_. - _There_; e takoto mai _ra_, _it lies there_. - -It is sometimes used in commands and energetic sentences, for _Then_. - - Haere _ra_, _go then_. - Heoi ano _ra_, _that is all about it then_. - -Often in replies; E pai ana? Ae _ra_. - -_Koa_ is a particle used mostly in correcting, &c., another speaker or -oneself: - - E pa, e he ana _koa_ koe, _O my friend you are wrong_. - Aana _koa_, _yes (you are right)_. - -It is difficult to define its meaning in the following phrases: - - Tena } - & } _koa_, _shew it here_, or _give it to me_. - Na } - E hara _koa_ (iana or ianei or iara) ra? _what else?_ - E ngaro hoki _koa_ iana, &c., _that, I confess, is_ (_right, wrong_, - &c.) - Ra _koa_ ka kai iho ia i te ata o tana kai, _(even though the - offering be devoured,) still (does the God) eat the shadow of the - food;--yet, nevertheless_. - -_U_ is often used as a mere expletive. Sometimes it has force in -exculpatory sentences; e. g., - - E taea te aha _u_ ana i te mamae? _how could the poor fellow help it - from the pain_? - - NOTE.--Though often used as an expletive, _u_ will not, however, - admit of being thrust into every sentence. Some foreigners seem - peculiarly fond of using it. The following use of it is, at least in - Waikato, erroneous: "A he tangata nui hoki a Hone, he rangatira hoki - _u_ a ratou." We are unable, we confess, to state the meaning of this - last clause. The speaker, perhaps, intended the preposition _no_ by - _u a_, "a chief of their party." - -_Hoki_; Some of the uses of _hoki_ have been inserted under the -adverbs. We shall give a brief view of the principal of them here. Its -more general uses are, _also_, _for_, _because_: - - _He mea hoki_ ka tae mai ahau, _in consideration of my having come_. - Koia _hoki_, _yes truly (he is right)_, &c. - Ina _hoki_, (the same as _mei_ of Waikato,) viz., _as you may judge - from_. - Kahore ano i tae mai, _ina hoki_ te pu, te rangona, _he has not - arrived, as we may judge from the gun, its not being heard_. - _Nei hoki_, and _na_, or _ra_, hoki; Hopukia te poaka; Kua mau _ra_ - hoki, _oh, it has been caught_. - Kati te tohe, kua riro atu _nei hoki_ te utu, _cease importuning; - inasmuch as the payment has been given_. - -This form we approve much of for expressing the following: "for the -death of the Lord Jesus Christ," kua mate _nei hoki_, &c., i. e., -_inasmuch as_, &c. - - Ki te titaha _hoki ra_, _well then, (if you won't give that,) - give me an axe_. - Ho mai _hoki_, _give it I say_. - -_Kau_; Riri _kau_, _angry without cause_. - - E ngenge ana koe? Ngenge _kau_! _Are you tired? Why should I be - tired?_ (lit. tired _at nothing_!) - E mau _kau_ ana te taura, _is_ barely _fastened_, i. e., _it has - only the name of being fastened_. - Ka mahi _kau_ ahau, _work_ without nothing. - Tu _kau_, _stand_ idle, naked, &c. - - - - -CHAPTER XI. - -OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. - - -_Me_, _while_; _Me_ te hongi, _me_ te tangi, _and saluting, and -crying_; i. e., _while saluting he is crying_. - - _With_;[28] E mahi ana _me_ te whakaaro ano ki te utu, he is working, - _and_ is at the same time mindful of payment. - - Inoi atu _me_ te ngakau aroha, pray _with_ a loving heart. - Haere tahi _me_ ia, went together _with_ him. - - _As_; _Me_ koutou hoki i wakarere i to koutou kainga, _as_ ye also - left your country. - - { o } - _Me_ { & } mua, _as formerly_. - { to } - _Me_ mua,[29] idem. - - _As far as_; _Me_ konei, _me_ Waitemata, _as far as from here to - Waitemata_. - - _If_; _Me he mea_ e pai ana, _if he is willing_. _Me_ i kahore koe, - if it had not been for you. - -_Ma_, _and_, (a numeral conjunction.) vid. numerals, page 24. - - _Mei_, (Waikato) _inasmuch as, as you may judge from_, (vid. _hoki_. - Same as _ina hoki_ of Ngapuhi.) - - _Koia_, _therefore_; _koia_ i riri ai, _therefore was he angry_. - -_Na_ and _a_. These particles are of very great use in Maori. They -correspond very closely with particle _v[=a]hv_ of Hebrew, and may be -recognised in our translations as occupying the place of _and_, -_then_, _therefore_, _but_, &c. Those who have not access to Professor -Gesenius' Hebrew Lexicon, will, we are sure, read with pleasure his -remarks upon its parallel in Hebrew. "It was a part of the simplicity -of ancient language to mark merely the connexion of ideas, without -expressing those nice distinctions of thought, which are designated by -the use of _causal_, _adversative_, _disjunctive_, and other -conjunctions. The prefix _vahv_ retains this variety of signification, -though other more definite conjunctions are also in use." This is -precisely the case with Maori. - -_Ina_, _ua_, (_ana_, Waikato) _when_; _Ina_ korero ahau, _when_ I -speak. - -_If_, (occasionally,) chiefly in cases in which contingency is - attached to _when_: - - Ma wai e whai, _ina_ tere? _who is to follow it, (the canoe) if it - drifts?_ - - _Heoi_ (Ngapuhi), and heoti (Waikato), is a particle which - corresponds sometimes with _a_, and _na_, in its uses. It generally, - however, implies opposition, and might be translated by _but_, &c. - Sometimes also, it has the meaning of _so_, _then_, and sometimes, - (particularly in Waikato,) it is, in the end of sentences, redundant. - -_Ara_, _and then_, &c.; e. g., - - _Ara_ te meatanga atu a Hone, _and then John replied_. - - NOTE.--This particle is very often used as an adverb for videlicet, - forsooth, &c. - - Mo, } reira. - No, } for that cause, therefore.[30] - Na, } - Mona i tahae, _because_ he stole. - Inake ano, _Inake ano_ i kore ai e tupu, _a good reason_ indeed why - it did not grow (_thence, from that cause_.) - Ina whai ano (Waikato), idem. - Otira, } - Otiraia, } - Ia, } _but_, and _nevertheless_. - Raia, } - Atiia, (Waikato) } - Huatu, } - Kaore, and kahore, } - Tena ko tenei, } All these belong to the adversative - Tena, } (_sometimes_) } class, and denote _but_ with some - Ko, } } peculiarity however of the meaning and - E ngari, } (_sometimes_) } construction which can only be learned - E rangi, } } by practice. - E ngaro, } - E ao ia, } - Ahakoa; _although, ahakoa_ roa noa te tohe e kore e marere, - _although you importune long it will not be granted_. - - NOTE.--Ahakoa will almost always precede in the sentence, e. g., The - following "though we were sinners he loved us," should thus be - rendered _ahakoa_ hara noa tatou arohaina ana tatou e ia. - -Following are a few examples of phrases which supply the place of -conjunctions: - - _Ki te_ kahore e pai, _if_ he is not pleased. - _Ki te wa_ haere, _if_ you go. - _Ka pa_ nau, _if_ it had been yours. - _Ka pa tao_ (Ngapuhi) or tau (Waikato) na tatou, _if_ it had been we - that had done it. - Patu, ka aha? _If_ I beat him, what better will he be? lit. beat - him, what is (effected?) - I tika ano i a au, _titiro ana_ koe wahia iho, _I had put it all to - rights_, and you go _and break it in pieces_. - E korerotia atu ana, e whakatika mai ana, _he is spoken to, he rises - up_, i. e., _when_ I speak to him, he rises up against me. - _Pera hoki me_ Hana e whakatoi nei, _just as Hana teases_. - _Mana_ ka tika, _mana_ ka he, _even though_, (no matter whether,) - _it be right or wrong_. - Ko reira, _then_. - -The particle _ai_ is very useful in supplying the place of -conjunctions. (Vid. our remarks on it.) - -[28] This particle will often supply a good substitute for _with_, -when it denotes connexion, &c., a meaning which we believe to be but -seldom expressed by _ki_. (vid. prepositions, page 55.) - -[29] Some foreigners, we observe, use _me i mua_; this, however, is -decidedly erroneous. - -[30] The learned student will, however, notice that these words, as -well as _keia_, are only prefixed to conclusions which are the -_natural and necessary effect_ of a preceding proposition. For -example, we might use _mo reira_, &c., in such a sentence as the -following: "Men are sinners, _therefore_ men are exposed to the wrath -of God:" because the preceding proposition is clearly a _cause_ of the -latter. - -We could not, however, use any of them in such propositions as the -following: "the Tohungas are liars, _therefore_ the New Zealander -listens to liars;" "the Sun shines, _therefore_ the sun is a luminous -body;" "man is an animal, _therefore_ man has sensation;" because it -would not be true to say, that, because the Tohunga is a liar, he is -therefore listened to; because the sun shines it is luminous; or, -because man is an animal he has sensation. - -Wherever, then, the connection with the preceding proposition is -either _accidental_ or _abstract_, we must have recourse to other -words, such as _na_, _a_, _ra_, _pea_, &c., and these are largely used -in our translations. (vid. Mat. 5, 37--24--42, and N. T. _passim_.) - -The affirmative particles _ina_ and _ae ra_ will often supply a good -substitute, and will perhaps be logically correct. For the conclusion -is the proposition that we _in principio_ affirm to be true, and -having proved it, we then authoritatively pronounce it to be so. (vid. -our remarks on _ae_, &c., note, under adverbs of _affirmation_.) - - - - -CHAPTER XII. - -OF THE INTERJECTIONS. - - -Maori abounds in interjections. The following are the most common. It -will be seen in this part of speech that there is a considerable -variation in the different tribes. - - -INTERJECTIONS. - - _For calling to another person near at hand_, Ou! Ou! - _For reply to recall_, O, (in a falsetto tone). - _For drawing attention to statements, things_ &c., &c. - Inana! irara! ira! (Rotorua). - Aiaiai! (Taranaki). - Rere! Ere! nene! re! (Waikato). - Nana! (Ngapuhi). - _For exciting attention_, rara! (Waikato). - _Disapprobatory_, E, e! He! hi! ha! aeha! [=a]r[=a]r[=a]. - Ata! (Ngapuhi) Ae! - -Exclamations made when it has been found that the speaker was correct, -(corresponding to _ah_, _you see!_ _yes_, _to be sure_, &c.) Na ra -nei? Ar[)a]r[)a]! haka! (Waikato,) aheiha (Ngapuhi,) ae ra hoki. That -expressive of gratification at some misfortune having befallen -another; Kaitoa! - - _Of salutation to visitors_, Haere mai, haere mai! - Tauti mai, (Waikato). Nau mai, (Rotorua). - _Salutation of one meeting another_, Tena ra ko koe! or, Tena koe! - (lit, _that is you_). - _In reply to a salutation_, Ko koe ra! It is you! - _Of farewell_, Hei konei, _stop!_ Haere, go! E noho! ne? _Remain! - Will you?_ - _Of wonder_, Aue! Eue! (Waikato) Taukiri e! A! He inati! (Waikato). - -Besides these there are phrases which are often used as interjections; -e. g., - - _Ka tae_ taku matua, &c.! _Bravo, my father_, &c., corresponding to - our _thank you_. - _Ka tae_ he mamahi mau! _what heavy work for you_. - _Tauhou_ ki a Hone! (lit. _stranger to John!_) _Oh yes, Mr. John_. - Ka mahi a Hone, idem. - -Maori delights in interjectional and ironical sentences, and the -student who desires to be a good speaker should pay them much -attention, and study also to catch the tone of voice, &c. - -Some, who have not noticed them, have turned an exclamation into a -question, and thus altered the meaning of the sentence. "How many pigs -of John have better food than I!" we have heard thus translated, E hia -ranei nga poaka a Hone he pai ke ta ratou kai i taku, &c.? The -translation here obviously differs from the original. It should have -been, _Ano te tini_, or _tini noa iho_, or _ka tae te tini_, or _kia -tini_, _na_, (or _ano_) _te tini_, or _he tini nga poaka_, &c. - -And here we may observe that, in translating from another tongue into -Maori, it would be perverting all use of language to render by merely -a verbal correspondence, without any regard to the meaning; and that, -in these idiomatic phrases, it would be best, unless we wish to -establish the maxim of the French statesman,[31] "that language was -merely intended to conceal our feelings," to make our author employ -those corresponding expressions in Maori which he would most probably -have used had he been speaking in that language. - -We may observe, in conclusion, that Maori has no good form for such -optative interjections as _would that_, &c. There is, it is true, a -kind of substitute; but it cannot be expressed by our present -alphabet. It is formed by a sharp smack of the tongue against the -palate, and _na_ pronounced after it. The best form, for the present, -is, perhaps, _me i_, with a peculiar tone of voice; e. g., _Me i_ kite -ahau ia ia! If I had but seen him! or would that I had, &c. - -[31] The Abbe Talleyrand. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. - -OF THE SYNTAX. - - -PRELIMINARY REMARKS. - -Before we proceed to the consideration of the Syntax of Maori, it will -be necessary 1st. to explain some terms which we shall be obliged to -employ, and 2ndly, to make a few remarks on the general features of -Maori sentences. Some further remarks on this subject, we shall -reserve till we come to treat on the verbs. - -The _subject_ of a proposition is that concerning which anything is -affirmed or denied. The _predicate_ is that which is so affirmed or -denied of the subject. Thus, in the following sentence, Kua mate a -Hone, _John has died_, _Hone_ is the subject, and _mate_ is the -predicate. - - NOTE.--We can scarcely recognize the verbal particles as copulas. We - believe that their exclusive use is, to denote time. - -Propositions, or sentences, we divided (page 37) into _simple_ and -_compound_. Another division is here necessary; viz., into _complex_ -and _incomplex_. An _incomplex proposition_ is that whose subject and -predicate are simple terms; e. g., He hoiho tenei, _this is a horse_. - -A complex proposition is that which contains some qualifying, or -otherwise modifying, term in connexion with either _subject_ or -_predicate_; e. g., I mate a Hone _ki reira_. _Ki reira_, here, -qualifies the predicate _mate_. He tokomaha nga Pakeha i Akarana, -_many are the foreigners in Auckland_. Nga Pakeha i Akarana is the -_subject_, and tokomaha the _predicate_. - -He aroha no te Atua i ora ai tatou. This placed in due order, is "I -ora ai tatou, he aroha no te Atua," _we having been saved was a love -of God_. Here, _I ora ai tatou_ is the subject. - -Ko tou utu tena mo to hanganga i te whare? _Is that your payment for -your having built the house?_ Here, we conceive, _ko tou utu mo to -hanganga i te whare_ is the _subject_, and _tena_ the _predicate_. - - In examining the nature of Maori propositions, the student will soon - notice that they are characterized by a remarkable _brevity_ and - _abruptness_, as well as by the frequent occurrence of ellipses. As a - New Zealander is generally unequal to a train of consecutive thought, - so also is his language inadequate to exhibit with accuracy the - various processes of the civilized intellect, such as comparing, - abstracting, &c., or indeed any ideas beyond the simple and - monotonous details of his daily life. It is, if we may so speak, an - animated sketching, intended for general effect, the more delicate - lines being but faintly touched. - - The student has already seen that Maori is defective in particles of - _illation_, _comparison_, and _copulation_. The want of a verb - substantive, which is so useful as a _copula_ in other languages, - will often, where accuracy is desired, cause both clumsiness and - obscurity of construction. - - The process by which a New Zealander constructs his sentences, is very - similar to that of a child who is just beginning to speak. For - example: if the latter wishes to express, "Is that a horse?" "Give me - some bread," he will, most probably, say "a horse that?" "me bread." - He has the ideas of _himself_ and _bread_, and, by pronouncing the one - in immediate succession after the other, attempts to convey the idea - of their mutual connexion. So also will Maori, when it wishes to - express the dependence of two or more ideas on each other, place them - in close connexion, as distinct existences, and leave the hearer to - deduce their intended relations. From hence it may, _a priori_, be - collected. 1st. That Maori inclines to the _substantive form_. 2ndly, - That it will have a peculiar tendency to the _indicative mode of - statement_. 3rdly. That it delights in short sentences. 4thly. That it - will often, in consequence of the frequent occurrence of ellipses, - present constructions which will appear _strange_ to the student of - only polished languages, and even occasionally seem to defy analysis. - 5thly, That the clauses of the sentence, will, like its words, be - often thrown together without any connecting particles, and that we - shall often notice in their construction a frequent occurrence of - _epanorthosis_. - - On some of these heads we shall have to remark hereafter. The - last-mentioned feature is, however, of such importance in the - investigation of some of the difficult points of Maori, that we must - beg the student's leave to bring it here prominently before his - notice. - -_Epanorthosis_ is a figure of frequent occurrence in all languages, -but particularly in those of the East. It is "the qualifying a former -clause by the addition of another"[32] e. g., Ka tae te hohoro o ta -tatou kai, _te pau_! what great haste our food has made; (I mean) _the -being consumed_. Here _te pau_, is a clause qualifying the preceding; -e rua tahi enei, _he roa kau_, there are two here, _nothing but long_; -ringihia mai, _kia nohinohi_, pour me out some, _let it be little_, -(i. e., pour me out a little); e rite tahi ana ia kia koe, _te ahua_, -he is like you, (I mean,) _the countenance_; no reira a Ngatihau i -tino mau ai, _te karakia ai_, that was the cause why Ngatihau were -quite established, (I mean,) _the not adopting Christianity_. I riri -au kia ia, _kihai nei i whakaaro_, I was angry with him, (I mean,) _he -did not exercise thought in that matter_. Ko te tangata tenei, nana -nga kakano, this is the man, _his are the seeds_; (i. e., _this is the -person whose are_, &c.) He aha tau e mea, what is yours (actively) (I -mean,) _are doing_? i. e., _what are you doing?_ Haere ana Hone, me -tana hoiho. Ka puta pea tena ki raro, _e tihore ana_. So John started -and his horse. He has perhaps reached to the northward, (I mean,) -_is peeling_, (i. e., going along at a peeling, or rapid rate). - - 6thly. The student may be prepared to find the defect of the verb - substantive supplied in various ways in Maori--by the article, the - pronoun, the preposition, the adverb, and the verbal particles. - Instances of ellipsis he will find in almost every page--ellipsis of - the verb, of the noun, of the pronoun, &c., and, particularly, in our - illustration of the preposition _ki_. - - As distinctions between gender, number, case, and person, are very - rare in Maori, and as, moreover, a main business of syntax consists - in the adjusting of their several claims, we may hope that our work - here will be neither complicated, nor extended. - -[32] "Est sui ipsius quasi revocatio, qua id, quod dictum est, e -vestigio corrigitur."--Glass. edit Dathe, page 1350. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. - -SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. - - -1. _Ko_ is never used before appellatives without either _te_, _te -tahi_, and its plural _e tahi_, or one of the possessive pronouns -intervening, and it is almost always found to occupy the first place -in the sentence; e. g., - - _ko_ taku tamaiti, _this is my child_. - _ko_ e tahi kua kitea, _some were seen_. - -2. In this position a very common use of it is, to imply the verb -substantive. - -3. The article _he_, it will be seen, does not require its help for -such a purpose; e. g., _he_ rakau tenei, _this is a tree_; _he_ mate -toku, _a sickness is mine_, i. e., I am sick. - -4. All the functions of _a_ (vid. page 13) are performed by _ko_, when -the noun, &c., to which it is prefixed, precede in the sentence; e. g., - - _Ko_ koe te haere, _you are the person that is to go_. - _Ko_ runga kau i kainga, _the tops only were eaten_. - -5. Sometimes it will be found in other parts of the sentence, (_a_) when -the terms, of which the sentence is composed, areconvertible,[33] -or are intended, at least, to be represented as similar; e. g., _ko_ -te timunga atu o konei _ko_ te pakeketanga o waho, _the ebbing of the -tide from here is low water outside_. - - Me he mea _ko_ Pahuru _ko_ Ngakete, _if Pahuru had been Ngakete_, &c. - _Ko_ au ra _ko_ ia, _I and he are (one.)_ - -(_b_) Sometimes, also, when there are two subjects of which the same -thing is affirmed, _ko_ will be prefixed to both; e. g., - - _Ko_ Kukutai _ko_ te Wherowhero, rite tahi raua, _Kukutai and - Wherowhero, they are equal both of them_. - -6. It will be seen in the above example that _ko_ will sometimes -represent _and_; e. g., e takoto nei _ko_ te pihi _ko_ te poro, _it -lies here, both the piece, and the end (of the bar of soap.)_ - -7. Very frequently, also, _ko_ may be denominated "the article of -specification and emphasis;" e. g., _Noku_ tena paraikete, _that -blanket is mine_; _ko_ taku paraikete tena, _that is my blanket_. The -former of these two sentences implies that the blanket is his -property; the latter denotes the same thing, with some further -specification; as being, for example, one that had been previously -_described_, _worn_, &c. - -Again, _ko_ Hone i haere, _John went_. - - I haere _a_ Hone, _idem_. - - Here also, there is, we think, a difference. The latter sentence - merely says that John went; the former that John, as - _contradistinguished_ from some one else, was the person who went; - literally, _it was John (who) went_. - -8. Sometimes also, in animated description, _ko_ will follow the verb; -e. g., na ka hinga _ko_ Haupokia, na ka hinga _ko_ Ngapaka, _then fell -Haupokia, then fell Ngapaka_. - -9. _Ko_ will generally be prefixed to the subject,[34] e. g., _ko_ ta -te tangata kai _he_ poaka, _he_ riwai, _he_ aha, _he_ aha, _the food -for man is pork, potatoes, et caetera, et caetera_; _ko_ Oropi _te_ -whenua taonga, _Europe is the land of property_. - - N.B.--There are some exceptions to this rule, especially when tenei, - &c., are employed. (vid. etiam rule 5.) - -10. _Ko_ is always prefixed to every title or name of men or things -which stands alone without the verb; e. g., - - "_Ko_ te karere o Nui Tireni," _the (Newspaper) the Karere o Nui - Tireni_. - _Ko_ Hone, _here is John, or, John_. - - NOTE.--Occasionally we meet with an exception to this rule, in - emphatic, elliptical, and complementary clauses; e. g., in taunting; - tou ngene, _your ngene_[35]; taku tirohanga, _my looking_, i. e., - _when I looked_. Ka whati tera, te pa, _that was discomfitted, the - pa_. Vid. our illustrations of _Epanorthosis_ in _preliminary - remarks_, page 104. - -11. It is sometimes used in elliptical sentences like the following: E -pai ana ano; _ko_ te maeke ra, _we are willing; but the cold_, i. e., -_we should be glad to go only for the cold_; Haere ana ia, _ko_ tona -ko tahi, _he went by himself alone_. - - NOTE.--It may be seen in the above example that ko is sometimes used - for _but_; so also in the following: Me he mea ko te Paki, e rongo - ratou; _ko tenei_ e kore e rongo, _if it had been Paki they would - have listened_, but _as for this, they will not listen_. - -12. In connexion with the two preceding rules, we may observe, that ko -is almost always prefixed to the nominative absolute; e. g., _ko taua -kupu au_, e kore e rangona, _as for that word of yours, it will not be -listened to_. - - _Ko te hunga whakapono_, ka ora ratou, _believers, they will be - saved_. - - N.B.--In some districts the ko is omitted under this rule. - -13. _Nga_ we have designated as the plural of the _definite_ article -page 12. The student will therefore remember that it does not -recognize the rules _a_, _b_, _c_, _d_, _e_, mentioned under -_te_--pages 10 and 11. - -14. _The omission of the article._ - -There are some cases in which no article is prefixed to the noun, -(_a_) when the noun follows immediately after the verb; e. g., -Whakamate tangata, _murderous_; (vid. compound words page 17.) Haere -po, _go by night_. - -(_b_) Nouns preceded by the adverbial particles _a_ and _tua_; e. g., -tatau _a tangata_, _count man by man_. - -(_c_) When a possessive pronoun is associated with the noun; ho mai -toku kakahu, _give me my garment_. - - NOTE.--It is, however, highly probable that the singular possessive - pronouns, (vid. page 29.) are compounded of the article _te_, and the - plural form _oku_, &c., and that _oku_, _aku_, _ona_, &c., are - compounded of _o_ and _a_, and the personal pronouns _ahau_, _koe_, - _ia_: these pronouns assuming the forms of _oku_, _ou_, _ona_, &c., - when in connection with _o_, and _a_; in the same way as they adopt - the form of _mona_, _nona_, &c., when in combination with the - prepositions _mo_, _no_, &c., &c. (vid. our remarks on noku and maku - page 22, and _tenei_, &c., page 31.) Sometimes, indeed, we find the - singular possessive pronouns thus resolved; e. g., kei _tenei_ taha - _oku_, on this side _of me_. If it had not been for _nei_ the speaker - would have said _to_ku taha. The _nei_ however attracts the _te_, and - thus resolves _toku_ into its component parts. - -15. _He_ differs in its uses from _te tahi_ and _e tahi_. - -(_a_) _He_, of itself, often implies the verb substantive. (Vid. - rule 3). - -(_b_) _He_ is very seldom found after a preposition. It is almost -always found in the nominative case after the substantive verb; e. g., -he tangata tenei; he kino kau koutou. - - - Thus it would not be correct to say, I kainga, e _he_ kuri, it was - eaten by a dog; hei tiki i _he_ rakau, _to fetch a stick_. It should - be e _te_ kuri, i _te tahi_ rakau. - - NOTE.--_He_ is sometimes found after _ma_ and _na_, e. g., nana i - homai _he_ paraikete i mahana ai au. We believe, however, that this - exception to rule (_b_) is only apparent, and that _he waka_, here, is - the nominative case. (Vid. _Verbs_.) - -16. _A._ A strange use of _a_ is sometimes met with in Waikato. When -two nouns follow each other in apposition, _a_ is sometimes prefixed -to the latter; e. g., Ka noho atu tera i te kai mana _a_ te kahawai, -_he indeed will remain away from the food for him!--the kahawai!_ - -E hoe ana ki Akarana, ki te kai mana _a_ te paraoa, _he is paddling to -Auckland for food for himself--flour_. - -Sometimes it occurs in sentences like the following, Na wai tenei -haere _a_ te po? _Whose going is this_, (I mean,) _in the night?_ -i. e., _who ever goes by night?_ - -(_b_) A personal pronoun following the verb in the nominative will -very seldom take _a_ before it; e. g., Whakangaromia iho _ratou_. It -would not be correct to say _a_ ratou. - - To this rule there are a few exceptions, e. g., tu ana ratou, _a_ ia - tangata _a_ ia tangata, _they stood each man_. - -(_c_) Proper names are not subject to the above rule; e. g., it would -not be correct to say, Whakangaromia iho _Ngatipaoa_. It should be _a_ -Ngatipaoa. - -(_d_) When a question is asked in reference to a preceding remark, _a_ -will precede the pronoun, e. g., E ki na koe. _A_ wai? A koe ra, _You -assert--who? You, forsooth_. - -17. The articles, definite and indefinite, are always repeated in -Maori, as in French, before every substantive in the sentence; e. g., -Ko _te_ whakapono _te_ take o _te_ aroha, raua ko _te_ pai, _faith is -the root of love, and good works_. - -18. Adjectives used substantively require the article; e. g., _He_ -tika rawa _te_ he ki a ia, _the wrong is perfectly right in his -opinion_. - -19. Frequently, also, the article is prefixed to what would be a -participle in English; e. g., Kei _te noho_, _he is at the sitting_, -i. e., _he is sitting_; ka tata _te maoa_, _the being cooked is near_. - - NOTE.--It is, however, probable that all such words as noho, &c., - should, in constructions like the above, be regarded as substantives. - We shall have to treat on this hereafter. (Vid. _Verbs_.) - - NOTE 2.--Further remarks on the articles we shall reserve to the next - chapter. - -[33] Convertible terms, we need not remind the learned reader, are -those, the meaning of which is so similar, that they may be -substituted one for the other. - -[34] The learned student will here see that Maori has, in this respect, -the advantage over Hebrew; confusion often occurring in that language -from the want of some means for determining which is the subject and -which the predicate. - -[35] Ngene is a scrofulous tumour. - - - - -CHAPTER XV. - -SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. - - -Sec. 1.--_Nouns in Apposition._--These were partly considered in the last -chapter, and we now proceed to offer further remarks respecting them:-- - -When one or more nouns follow another in apposition, and are equally -definite in meaning, the same article that is prefixed to the first -will be prefixed to all the rest; e. g., _He_ tangata kino koe, _he_ -tangata kohuru, _you are a bad man, a murderer_; _ko_ au tenei, _ko_ -tou matua, _this is I, your father_; mau mai _taku_ pu, _tera_ i roto -i te whare, _bring here my gun, that in the house_. - - The following sentences are erroneous:--Tenei ahau, _ko_ to koutou - hoa, te mea nei, _this is I your friend, who says_, &c.; Tiakina to - tatou kainga, _ko_ Waikato, _take care of our settlement, Waikato_; - the _ko_ should have been omitted in the former sentence: instead of - the _ko_ in the latter, we should have had _a_. Proper names, and - pronouns, will only take their proper articles; e. g., Nohea tenei - Kingi _a_ Parao? _whence was this King Pharoah?_ - - N.B.--There are exceptions to these rules. Some of them will be - mentioned under the next head. - -Sec. 2.--The preposition, which is prefixed to the first of two or more -nouns in apposition, will be prefixed to all the rest; e. g., _Naku_ -tenei pukapuka, _na_ tou hoa, _na_ Tarapipipi, _this letter is mine_, -(i. e., was written by me,) _your friend's, Tarapipipi's_: kei nga -Pakeha _ta_ matou whakaaro, _ta_ nga tangata Maori, _with the -Europeans are the sentiments of us, of the New Zealanders_. - -The same usage holds in the vocative case, _E_ hoa, _E_ Hone, _Friend -John_. - - The following examples will shew that this rule, which seems as yet - to have escaped the notice of foreigners, is worthy of attention; a - ka kite i a Hone _te_ tamaiti a Hemi, _and he saw John, the son of - James_. The meaning of this, as it stands, is, _the son of James saw - John_. Kei a koutou, _nga_ tangata Maori, _in the opinion of you the - New Zealanders_. This literally means, _the New Zealanders are with - you_. In the first of these two sentences it should be, _i_ te - tamaiti, &c., in the second, _kei_ nga tangata Maori. Again; kua - kainga e koutou, te kura, _it was eaten by you, the school_. The - literal meaning of this is, _the school have been eaten by you_. Kua - kainga e koutou _ko_ te kura, _it has been eaten by you the school_. - As it stands, it means, _it has been eaten by you and the school_. - Again, if we were to say, "Na Ihowa to tatou Atua, nana hoki tatou i - whakaora," we should imply that _our God was made by Jehovah, and - that it was he who saved us_. It should be, Na _to tatou Atua_. - - There are however occasional exceptions to this rule, which it will - often be useful to remember; (_a_) when brevity of diction is desired - both preposition and article will be sometimes omitted before the - second substantive; e. g., i rokohanga atu e ahau ki _Mangere_, - _kainga_ o te Tawa, _(he) was overtaken by me at Mangere, (the) - settlement of Tawa_; i rongo ahau ki a Koiunuunu, _hungawai_ o - Panaia, _I heard it from Koiunuunu (the) father-in-law of Panaia_; na - te Riutoto, _whaea_ o Paratene, _it belongs to Riutoto (the) mother - of Broughton_. When a pause, also, is made between the two - substantives, the preposition will be _sometimes_ omitted before the - second; e. g., kei te kainga o te Wherowhero, _te_ rangatira o - Waikato, _at the Settlement of Wherowhoro, the Chief of Waikato_. E - pa, kua kite ahau i a koe--_to_ mamingatanga hoki ki a au! _Friend, I - have found you out, your bamboozling of me forsooth._ - - N.B.--This distinction is very similar to that which obtains in - English for the regulating of the sign of the possessive case. In such - sentences, for example, as the following, "for David, my servant's - sake," we should always have the sign of the possessive annexed to the - latter noun; because it follows the preceding one in close and - unbroken succession. In the following however--"This is Paul's advice, - the Christian Hero, and great Apostle of the Gentiles," the sign of - the possessive is omitted; because the connexion between _Paul and - hero_, is not so immediate as in the preceding example. So, also, in - Maori; when the latter noun follows in a complementary clause, as - descriptive, or explanatory of the former, and has thus a pause, or - comma, intervening, it may _occasionally_ dispense with the - preposition by which the former noun is preceded. - -Sec. 3. And we may here state, that clauses in _epanorthosis_ will -frequently reject those rules of government which they, under other -circumstances, would have recognised; and that they will often rather -partake of the nature of an exclamation, (vid. chapter 14, Sec. 10, -_note_.) Thus in the example just adduced, _to mamingatanga_ is not in -the objective case, as is _koe_ in the clause preceding. It would -appear that after the speaker had said, _Kua kite ahau i a koe_, he -recollected himself, and exclaimed, in explanation,--_to mamingatanga -hoki_. In a leisurely constructed sentence he would most probably have -said, "_Kua kite ahau i a koe_, i _to_," &c. Again, in the first -example of _epanorthosis_ (page 104), _Ka tae te hohoro o ta tatou -kai, te pau!_ a native would not say, _o te pau_, as strict grammar -requires; but rather puts _te pau_ in the form of an exclamation. - -Sec. 4. The answer to a question will always, in its construction, -correspond to the question; e. g., _Na_ wai i tango? _Na_ Hone, _Who -took it? John_. _I_ a wai taku pu? _I_ a Hone, _With whom was my gun? -with John_. - -Sec. 5. There is no form in Maori corresponding to that contained in the -following expressions, "Land of Egypt," "River Euphrates." To -translate these by "Whenua _o_ Ihipa," &c., would be to represent -Egypt, and Euphrates, as individuals possessing that land, and that -river. To render them by apposition would we fear not much improve our -Maori diction; (though it would certainly be more in accordance with -Maori analogy.) Here, therefore, necessity must make a law for -herself, and recognize the former mode of construction as legitimate. -At the same time, it is desirable that it should be adopted as seldom -as possible. Thus, in the following: "Mount Horeb," "Mount Sinai," -&c., we should approve of "Mount" being rendered as a proper name, to -which it closely approximates in English, and for which we think we -may claim the permission of the original. We therefore approve of -those phrases being rendered, "Maunga Horepa," "Maunga Oriwa," &c. -Lastly; such forms as "the book of Genesis," &c., should never we -think, be rendered by te pukapuka o Kenehi, &c.; for a native will, -thereby, be led to believe that Genesis wrote the book. The -difficulty, however, may be here easily obviated: for _book_ may be -altogether omitted, and "ko Kenehi" simply employed--a form, by the -way, which is adopted by the Septuagint. - -Sec. 6. _The possessive case._--This case is much used in Maori. It is -employed often to denote intensity; e. g., Ko _to_ Ngatimaniapoto -tangata nui ha ia! _Oh, he is Ngatimaniapoto's great man_; i. e., _he -is a very great man in that tribe_. - -It will, also, in some instances supersede the nominative or objective -of the person; e. g., the following sentence is erroneous: kihai ahau -i pai kia whakakahoretia ia, _I was not willing to refuse him_; this -as it stands, means _to despise or make a cipher of_. It should have -been, kia whakakahoretia _tana_; negative _his_. (request sub.) - -Sec. 7. It is sometimes useful for denoting the time from which an action -has commenced; e. g., kahore i kai, _o_ to matou uranga mai ano, _we -have not eaten_ since _we landed_; Moe rawa atu ki Waitoke. Te -haerenga atu _o_ hea? _We slept at Waitoke. From what place did you -start?_ Te taenga mai o Hone, kihai i rongo. Te tononga iho _o_ te -ata, _when John came here we would not listen to him; (though) he -continued to ask_ from _the break of day_. - -_The possessive form is often used in predication; vid. syntax of -verbs._ - -Sec. 8. Often the possessive preposition is used where, in English, a -different one would be employed; e. g., _no_ Otahuhu tenei ara, _this -path (leads) to Otahuhu_; kahore he wai _o_ roto, _there is no water -in it_. Ka kainga e to matua tane te roi _o_ te tuatanga[36] ki te -kainga tapu. Apopo ake ka kainga e te Ariki te roi o tana tamaiti, -_the fern root_ OF THE TUATANGA _is eaten by the father. Next day the -fern_ OF HIS CHILD _is eaten by the Ariki (head chief)_. - -Sec. 9. A word in the possessive case occurring with another twice -repeated, will generally follow after the first of such words; e. g., -ki te tahi taha _ona_, ki te tahi taha, _at either side of him_; lit. -_at one side of him, at one side_. Sometimes other words will be found -to intervene between the possessive case and the word that governs it: -e. g., ko nga tangata _katoa tenei o_ Waimate,--_here are all the men -of Waimate_. - -Sec. 10. The word by which a possessive case is governed, is often not -expressed in Maori; e. g., ka tokowha _o_ matou ka mate, _four of us -have died_; e wha nga rau o te kupenga a Hone, _there were four hundred_ -(_fishes_ sub.) _of the net of John_; kei hea to Hone?--_where is -John's?_ (garment sub.) - -Sec. 11. In the northern part of this island when a noun is placed in -immediate connexion with such pronouns as _noku, moku, &c._, it will -sometimes omit the article before it; e. g., no ratou _Atua_ a Ihowa, -_whose God is the Lord_; ka meinga mona _wahi_, appoint _him a -portion_. - - NOTE.--This form is rare in Waikato. - -Sec. 12. When two substantives meet together, one of which denotes the -material of which the other consists, or some quality belonging to it, -the word denoting the material, quality, &c., will simply follow the -other as part of a compound word; e. g., he whare _papa_, _a_ board -_house_; ika _moana_, _a sea fish_; he repo _hurakeke_, _a flax -swamp_; he oranga _patunga_, _the survivors from a slaughter_; he -tangata _kupu rau_, _a man of a hundred words_; i. e., a deceitful -person. - -Sec. 13. Not unfrequently, when some circumstance or quality, is -attributed to a person, it will be simply affirmed to be him; e. g., -He _uaua kiore koe_, _you are a rat's strength_; _he taringa whiti rua -(or tua,)_ koe, _you are an_ erring _ear_; i. e., _one who does not -hear correctly_; he kaone tenei, _this_ (heap of potatoes) _is a -gown_; i. e., to purchase a gown; he aha koe? _what are you?_ (i. e., -what are you come for?) Ko _au_ ra ko _ia_, _I am he_; i. e., he and I -are of the same mind, &c.; ko taku iwituaroa tena, _that is my -backbone_; (a form for making a thing sacred.) - - NOTE.--This mode of predication seems to have been much in use - amongst the Hebrews; vid. Gen. 41, 26. The seven good kine (are) - seven years, and chap. 46, 34, "Every shepherd is an abomination;" - "That rock was Christ;" "This is my body;" "Ye were once darkness," - &c. - -Sec. 14. Another particular, also, in which Maori will be found to -resemble Hebrew is, the frequent substitution of the substantive for -the adjective. Thus, we frequently hear, _he kakakore_ koe, you are -weakness; _he kino_ te rangi nei, the sky is badness, &c., neither -must the student imagine as have some in the interpretation of the -Scriptures, that this mode of construction is always emphatic. - -Sec. 15. The objective case almost always follows the verb; e. g., ka -ngau _i a au_, _he will bite me_; except sometimes in sentences in -which _na_, _ma_, &c. are used; e. g., _nana_ ahau i tiki ake, _he -fetched me_; _noku_ ka mate. - - NOTE.--This form will be considered hereafter, (vid. _Verbs_). - -Sometimes a noun, which is plural in meaning, will take the form of -the singular; e. g., ko nga tamariki a Kaihau hei _tamaiti_ ki a te -Katipa, _the_ children _of Kaihau are a_ child _to Katipa_; i. e., -stand in the relation of children. - -Sec. 16. _Compound Words._--A word in connection with a compound word -will often be governed by one of the simples of which the latter -consists; e. g. Kai atawhai _i a koe_; _one to take care of you_; -_koe_ here is governed by _atawhai_; ki te whenua kai mau, _to the -land of food for you_; _mau_, here is influenced by _kai_. - -Sec. 17. A verb can always be changed into a personal agent by prefixing -_kai_; e. g., tiaki ia, _to guard_; kai tiaki ia, _a guard_. - -Sec. 18. On the prefixing and omitting of the article _te_ to -_proper names_; - -To lay down any exact rules respecting this subject is, we fear, -impossible: neither, indeed, is it very necessary; as genuine Maori -names are being fast exchanged for those of foreigners. There are, -however, a few particulars which deserve notice. (a) A simple -substantive, adopted as a proper name, may, or may not have _te_ -prefixed; chiefly as caprice regulates; (b) If, however, the noun be -in the plural number _te_ is never prefixed; e. g. Ngakainga; (c) A -verb and words compounded of verbs, will generally omit it. e. g. -Tangi: (d) Numerals, as far as _ten_, will generally take it: (e) The -proper names which omit _te_ will be found perhaps to be nearly double -in number those which take it. - - NOTE.--The prefixes _rangi_ and _ngati_ belong chiefly, the former to - the names of females, the latter to the names of tribes. - -On the distinction between _o_ and _a_; - -Sec. 19. This very useful feature of Maori does not seem to be clearly -recognized in some parts of New Zealand. It obtains, however, in the -other islands of these seas, and may be satisfactorily shewn, even now -to exist in those parts of this island in which it would be least -expected: for example; all will admit that _na_ku i patu, _mine was -the having struck_; i. e., _I struck (him)_, is different from _no_ku -i patu; _because I struck him_; and that _ma_ te aha? will signify, -_by what means?_ and _mo_ te aha? _for what reason?_ - -The words in which distinction obtains are _mo_ and _ma_, _no_ and -_na_, _o_ and _a_, and their compounds, _mona_ and _mana_, _nona_ and -_nana_, _toku_ and _taku_: the first and leading distinction between -these two forms is (a) that _o_ implies a passive meaning, _a_ an -active. Thus, he patu _moku_ is, _a striking for me_, i. e., for me to -suffer; he patu _maku_ is _an instrument for me to strike with_, (b) -_o_ also implies the inherency, and propriety of a quality or thing, -as well as the time and moral cause of an action. - -Hence it will, almost always, be prefixed to the members of the body, -to land enjoyed by inheritance, to sickness, the productions of -nature, such as fruits, &c., &c. Thus, we seldom hear, [=a]ku -ringaringa; n[=a]ku tena oneone; he mate n[=a]ku; _o_ is almost always -employed. Again, we always hear, _noku_ i haere mai nei, _since I came -here_; _mou_ i tutu, _because you were disobedient_; _nona_ te he, -_his was the error_. - -(c.) _O_ is always employed in talking of garments and houses, which -are in wear, use, &c. Thus, _naku_ tena whare means, _I built that -house_, Noku, &c., _I dwell in it_. - -Sec. 20. _A_ is prefixed to the _agent_, and implies that the noun, which -is connected with that agent, is either an act of it, or an instrument -with which, or sometimes a thing upon which the action is performed, -such as tools, cultivations, food, _words_, &c., (as _kupu_, _korero_; -because they are fashioned by the tongue); e. g., _taku_ toki; _naku_ -tena mara, _maku_ te kupu ki mua; kai _mau_. - -Sec. 21. When the action is intransitive, _o_ is generally employed; e. g. -te toronga atu _o_ te ringa o Hone; _to_ku haerenga. To this rule, -however, there are many exceptions. - - NOTE.--Visitors, slaves, or servants, children; (i. e. own children; - or children of whom the individual has the management), husband, - (tane), wife, (wahine), will take the _a_; when, however, _hoa_, - _ariki_, _rangatira_, _matua_, _whanaunga_, are used, _o_ will be - prefixed. _Reo_ also will take _o_; (the voice, being a part of the - man). Oranga, also though it applies to food, will take _o_ after it; - e. g. kai hei oranga _mo_ matou, _food to support us_. In the - following passage "n_o_na te whiunga i mau ai to tatou rongo," _the - chastisement of our peace was upon him_, the _o_ in the _nona_ has, - we think, supplied a more concise and clear rendering than could have - been attained without it.--If it had been, "N_a_na te whiunga, &c.," - we should have understood that it was he who _inflicted_, instead of - _suffered_ the chastisement. It should be remembered that there are - two pronunciations of _taku_, and _tana_; viz., t[)a]ku, and t[=a]ku, - t[)a]na, and t[=a]na; the short _a_ corresponds to the _o_; the long - _a_ to the _a_ of _ma_ and _na_. Of tou, _yours_, there are also two - pronunciations; viz., _tou_, and _to_, the former corresponds to the - _o_ of _mona_; the latter sometimes to the _a_ of _mana_. - - NOTE.--The _to_ is very frequently used instead of the _tou_--chiefly - in those parts of the sentence in which euphony requires that the - sound should not be prolonged. - -The importance of attending to these distinctions between the _o_ and -the _a_ may be shewn by a few examples; he hangi _mau_, is _an oven -with which you may cook food_; he hangi _mou_, is _an oven in which -you are to be cooked_, and would be a most offensive curse; he taua -_maku_ is a party with which I may attack another; he taua _moku_, is -_a party come to attack me_; te ngutu _o_ Hone, is _John's lip_; te -ngutu _a_ Hone is his _word_, or _report_, &c. - -[36] The _tua_ is the religious ceremony performed by the father, or -the _Ariki_ of the tribe, when the child was born, to remove the -_tapu_ from the mother and the settlement. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. - -SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. - - -Sec. 1. Adjectives generally follow substantives; e. g., he tangata -kohuru, _a murderer_. Sometimes, however, they will take the form of -an adverb, and precede; e. g., homai _katoa_ mai nga mea, _give (me) -all the things_. Sometimes, also, they will take the form of a verb -and precede; e. g., _nui rawa_ taku riri, _very great is my anger_--or -of a substantive; e. g., he _nui_ taku riri, idem. - -Sec. 2. The pronominal adjectives, _tenei_, &c., and _taua_ will always -precede; e. g., _tena_ mea. - -Sec. 3. Adjectives will generally take the form of the noun with which -they are connected; i. e., if the noun be of the verbal form, so also -will be the adjective; e. g., oranga tonutanga, _eternal life_; -rerenga pukutanga, _sailing hungry_. - - NOTE.--To this rule there are many exceptions. Thus, we have kainga - _kotahi_, _one eating_; i. e., _one meal_; matenga nui, patunga tapu, - whakamutunga pai, tikinga hangarau, korerotanga tuatahi. In many - cases observation can alone determine when such forms are admissible. - As a general rule, it would perhaps be correct to say that when the - verbal noun is of very familiar use, so as almost to have its verbal - character forgotten, or when some _thing_ or _single_ act, is spoken - of, it will sometimes admit after it an adjective of the simple form. - It will, we think, also be found that such common adjectives as nui, - pai, katoa, and also the numerals most frequently follow in the - simple form. - -Sec. 4. Under other circumstances, the adjective will follow in the -verbal form, especially when diversity or a number of acts of the -same kind, is intended. Thus, oku nohoanga katoa will mean _all my -settlements_; aku nohoanga katoatanga, _all the times in which I sit -down_. The following expressions are objectionable: korerotanga -whakamut_u_, tirohanga ata_whai_, whakinga puk_u_. - -Sec. 5. It should be noticed, perhaps, here, that we sometimes find the -verbal noun used as an adjective or participle, and with a passive -meaning: e. g., he toki tua, is _an axe to fell with_; he toki -_tuakanga_, _an axe which has been used in felling_; he mea -_whakakakuranga_ mai no tawahi, (clothes) _worn abroad and sent here_. -Whakakahu would in this construction be seldom used. On the other hand -we meet with pu whakamoe; _gun taken to bed with you_; poaka whangai, -_fed pig_. - -Sec. 6. _Many adjectives to one substantive._--It is contrary to the -genius of Maori to allow many adjectives to follow one substantive. -When, therefore, it is desired to affirm many qualities of the same -word, the word itself will be repeated before each adjective; e. g., -_a great and good man_, would be thus rendered: he _tangata_ nui, he -_tangata_ pai; or the adjectives will be converted into substantives, -by taking the article _he_ before them. Thus, the above sentence might -be rendered: _he nui, he pai_ tena tangata, _he was a great_, &c.; a -large red blanket might be thus rendered: he paraikete nui, he _mea_ -whero. Sometimes the adjective will be resolved into the verb; "a -great and terrible God," would be thus rendered; he Atua nui, _e -wehingia ana_. - -Sec.. 7. The following are instances in which an adjective is made to -qualify two substantives: ko te poaka raua ko te paraoa, _he reka -kau_, _pork and flour (they are both) sweet, or (a sweetness)_; he mea -reka te poaka, he me reka te paraoa, idem. Tena koa etahi hate, etahi -tarau hoki, _kei nga mea pai_: _Shew some shirts and some trousers; -let them be good ones_: _i. e._, _shew some good shirts, &c._ - -Sec. 8. Sometimes the adjective will unexpectedly assume the form of a -verb or substantive, e. g., kei ona kainga, _e_ (or _he_,) maha, _he -is at his many settlements_. The following form is heard at Taranaki: -kia toru _he_ ra, _it will take three days_. Sometimes adverbs are -used as adjectives; e. g., he tohunga _rawa_, _a great artist, &c._, -te _tino_ tangata, _the very individual_. The following form in which -the verb supplies the place of the adjective, is, we believe, in -general use: a pouri ana o matou ngakau mo tenei patunga o matou _ka -rua_; _our hearts are dark at this second murder of our friends, lit., -this murder of our friends, it is two_. - -_Comparison of adjectives._--The comparative degree is denoted in -various ways in Maori. (a) The first, and most common, is similar to -that adopted in Hebrew; viz. by putting the preposition _i_ (_from_) -after the adjective; e. g., e kaha ana a Hone _i_ a Pita, _John is -stronger than Peter_. (b) Sometimes there is joined to the adjective -some adverb of intensity; e. g., e kaha _rawa_ ana a Hone _i_ a Pita, -_John is much stronger, &c._ (c) Sometimes it is denoted by the -adjectives ngari, and rangi, the verb following in epanorthosis; e. g., -e ngari a Hone i a Pita, _e kaha ana_. - -(d.) Sometimes the comparative is denoted by some approbatory, and the -positive by some disapprobatory term; e. g., e _pai_ ana tenei -paraikete, e _kino_ ana tera, _this blanket is good, that is bad_. -(e.) Sometimes the positive is put into the negative form, and the -comparative into the affirmative; e. g., e ngari ano te patu i a au; -aua e tangohia oratia taku kainga, _it is better to kill me, do not -take away my settlement while I live_; i. e., I should rather die than -have my possessions taken from me. E nui ana taku hara, e kore e taea -te muru, _my sin is greater than that it can be pardoned_; lit. my sin -is great, it cannot be pardoned. He _hira_ te hunga i a koe nei; _e -kore_ e ho atu e ahau nga Miriani ki a ratou, _the people that are -with thee are too many for me to give the Midianites into their -power_. - -(f.) Sometimes the positive is made antecedent, and the comparative -consequent; e. g., me patu ano au ka riro ai toku kainga, _you must -kill me, and_ THEN _take my possessions_. - -(g.) Following, are two modes of comparison which are sometimes met -with: _poka ke atu_ te pai o te ra tahi _i_ ou whare i nga ra ko tahi -mano, _one day in thy courts is better than a thousand_. Ma tenei e -whakakoakoa ai a Ihowa _tera atu_ i te koakoatanga ki te okiha, _this -shall please the Lord better than an ox_. - - NOTE.--These two forms are not much used in Waikato. The following is - sometimes heard, but it is a weak mode of comparison: _rere ke_ ana - te pai o tenei _i_ tera, _the goodness of this is different from - that_. - -(h.) A very common process for denoting an _inferiority of degree_, is -to associate two contrary qualities: e. g., pai kino, _indifferently -good_; roa poto, (long short,) _of moderate length_; mangu ma nei, -(black white,) _blackish_. - -(i.) The adverb _tua_ prefixed to the adjective denotes a similar kind -of comparison: e. g., _tua_ riri, _somewhat angry_; _tua_ pouri, -_rather dark_. (k.) Sometimes comparison is implied by reduplication -of one or more syllables: e. g., pouri_uri_, _darkish_ (as in -twilight). All adjectives which, in English, are preceded by some -qualifying adverb: as _somewhat_, _not very_, _moderately_, _as it -were_, &c., can be rendered into Maori by one, or other, of these -three last methods. - -_The Superlative degree._ Maori has no direct form to mark the -superlative, but expresses it by various circumlocutions: (a.) by the -definite article prefixed, with, or without some word of intensity: e. g., -Ko au _te_ kaumatua, _I am the eldest son_; ko _te tino_ nohinohi -rawa tena, _that is the least_; ko te nui tenei o nga rakau _katoa_, -_this is the largest_ (lit. _the_ large one) _of all the trees_. (b.) -The form for the comparative sometimes necessarily implies the sense -of the superlative: e. g., he _tino_ mohio ia _i_ nga tangata katoa, -_he is the most wise of all men_. - -(c.) Following are two other forms for denoting the superlative: e. g., -e ngari a Hone e mohio ana; a, _waiho ano i_ a Wiremu te tino -mohio, _John is better, he understands; but leave the great knowledge_ -with _William_; or, whakarerea rawatia i a Wiremu, &c. - -Sometimes a great degree of intensity is denoted by a repetition of -the adjective, with a peculiarly prolonged sound of the first -syllable; e. g., n[=u]i, nui whakaharahara. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. - -SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. - - -_The particles prefixed to numbers._ - -_Ko._ Sec. 1. This word will often, without _te_, precede _tahi_; e. g., -toku _ko tahi_, _myself alone_; kia _ko tahi_, _be one_; i. e., pull -together. When tahi is used as a substantive, it will generally take -_te_; e. g., ko _te tahi_ tenei, _this is one_ (of them). - -Sec. 2. The numerals between _one_ and a _hundred_ will seldom take any -article; but _rau_ and _mano_ will take either _te_ or _he_; e. g., -_he_ rau pea, _it is perhaps a hundred_; ko tahi _te_ rau, or _te_ -mano. Sometimes the numerals lower than a 100 will take the article -_te_, when the substantive is not expressed but understood; e. g., e -taea e _te tekau_ te whakanehenehe ki _te hokorima_? _can the ten -contend with the fifty?_ - -Sec. 3. The simple numeral is mostly used in counting; e. g., tahi, rua, -toru, one, two, three, &c. Often, however, the verbal particle _ka_ is -used in the same sense; ka tahi, ka rua, &c., it is one, there are -two, &c. - -Sec. 4. _Ka_, prefixed to the numeral, generally denotes the _completion_ -of a number; e. g., _ka_ toru enei matenga oku i a koe, _this is the -third time I have been ill treated by you_, i. e., this makes up the -third, &c. - -Sec. 5. _E_ is a very frequent prefix of the numbers between _one_ and -_ten_. It differs from _ka_ in that it does not so distinctly imply -the _completion_ of, or the _arriving at_, a number, and that whereas -_ka_ will generally answer to the question, "How many have you -counted, made, &c., _e_ will be used in reply to "How many are there"? -e. g., _e_ hia ena kete? How many baskets are those? It would not -however be generally correct to say, _E_ hia ena kete _ka_ oti? It -should be _ka hia_. Again, ahea koe hoki mai ai? _Ka_ rua aku wiki. -_When will you return? in two weeks' time._ It should be _kia_ rua nga -wiki. - - NOTE.--This distinction, however, does not hold invariably, &c. - -Sec. 6. _Kia._--For its uses _vide verbal particles_. - -Sec. 7. NOTE.--The particles _i_ and _kua_ are occasionally found -prefixed to the numerals. (_Vide those particles_, VERBS.) - -Sec. 8. _The case and number following the numeral._ In most instances, -up to _one hundred_, the numeral will require no possessive case after -it; e. g., a, ho mai ana e ratou, e ono nga kete, _and they gave six -baskets_; lit. they were given by them, they were, (or are), six -baskets. - -Sec. 9. Beyond _one hundred_, however, a possessive case is very -frequently employed; e. g., ko tahi mano _o_ nga tau, one thousand -years. - -Sec. 10. When the noun is in the oblique case, the numeral will generally -_follow_ it; e. g., hei tapiri mo enei kete _e wha_, _as an addition -to these four baskets_. When it is in the nominative the numeral will -most frequently precede; e. g., _e wha_ nga kete, _there were four -baskets_. - -Sec. 11. It will be noticed that _tahi_ is sometimes postfixed to other -numerals, and adjectives, without any variation of meaning; e. g., e -rima _tahi_, five, turituri _tahi_, _what a noise (you are making)_. -_Tahi_ will sometimes take a plural after it; ko tahi _ona_ hoa, _one -were his companions_; i. e., he had one companion. - -Sec. 12. Sometimes, when it is desired emphatically to denote all the -individuals, or items contained in a certain number, the number will -be repeated; e. g., hokorima _hokorima iho_, _fifty fifty down_; i. e., -the _whole_ fifty were killed; e wha, wha mai ano, _four four to -me_; bring the whole four. In one instance, (viz., that of rua,) we -have the first syllable reduplicated to denote _both_; e. g., e tika -_rurua_ ana ano, _they are both right_. - -Sec. 13. Sometimes, in Waikato, we meet with an ironical use of numerals, -corresponding to that in English, "six of one, and half a dozen of the -other"; e. g., e whitu waru atu! they are seven eight other; e ngari a -Hone, e pai ana--_e wha atu_ i a Pita! _he is four besides Peter_; -i. e., he is not better than Peter. - -Sec. 14. _On the Ordinals._--The student has seen (page 26) the three -ways in which these may be formed. - -Sec. 15. There are, however, some distinctions between _tua_ and _whaka_, -as prefixes, which deserve to be noticed. (1.) _Tua_ is not frequently -found prefixed to numerals beyond _ten_. (2.) Occasionally, also, a -critical inquirer will, we think, detect a difference in the meaning -of the two particles. _Tua_ seems to denote the place, a thing, &c., -occupies in a series or gradation; _whaka_, a fraction which, being -added, makes the integer. Thus, in announcing a text, we might say -"Kei te ono o nga upoko, kei te _tuawha_ o nga rarangi," _it is in the -sixth chapter and fourth verse_. We could not however, say Kei te -_whakawha o_, &c. Again, a Native will say, Ko te _tua_hia tenei o nga -whakatupuranga ka tae iho ki a koe? Ko te tekau, _What number of -generations is this that reaches down to you?_ answer, _the tenth_. -Here the generations are represented as following in a regular -succession to the tenth. If the reply were "Ko te _whaka_tekau tenei," -we should understand that it is one, which added to the other nine, -will _make it ten_--a mode of expression which is sometimes -substituted for the following, "ko te whakakapi tenei o te tekau," -_this is one which fills up the place of the tenth_. The word whakapu -is often also used either to denote a tally, (or surplus one), or the -one which completes the number; hei _whakapu_ tenei mo aku riwai, -_this is a tally for; (or this completes the full number of) my -potatoes_. - - NOTE.--In speaking of a tenth, or tithe, of property, we should - prefer _whakatekau_ to _tuatekau_; the former being a _fractional_ - tenth, the latter an _ordinal_. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. - -SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. - - -Sec. 1. The personal pronouns follow the verb; e. g., e mea ana _ahau_. - -Sec. 2. They are often also omitted after it; e. g., Ka tukua atu te -purahorua, ka tae ki te pa, korerotia atu, Kia mohio i te taua e haere -mai nei----na ka te whai e te pa. Na wai i haere, a; ka tae ki nga -whakatakoto; ka pau te huaki, ka tangi te patu, ka whati tera, te pa; -_the messenger is sent_ (he) _arrives at the pa_ (it) _is told_ -(them,) _be on_ (your) _guard against the hostile party_ (which) _is -approaching, so the pa then pursued_. _On then_ (they) _proceeded, -till_ (they) _came to the ambush, the assault is made, the blow -resounds, that flies, the pa_. Sometimes, in Waikato, they are -redundant; e. g., kei te kai taro _mana_, _he is eating bread for -himself_. Examples however of this construction are not varied or -frequent. - -In Waikato the personal and possessive pronouns will frequently take -the particle _nge_ before them, but without any variation of meaning. - -Sec. 3. It was observed (page 29) that there is no word in Maori to -denote the pronoun _it_. Occasionally, however, that word will be -designated by _ia_ and its branches; e. g., waiho _mana_ e rapu atu te -tahi huarahi _mona_, _let it (the axe,) search out a path for itself_. -This perhaps should be explained by prosopop[oe]ia. Sometimes also we -hear the following: te paraoa _raua_ ko te poaka, _flour and pork_; -nga toki ki a _ratou_ whakatoki, nga kakahu ki a _ratou_ whakakakahu, -_axes by themselves, garments by themselves_. - -Sec. 4. Often the singular and dual of the personal pronouns will be -employed to denote a whole tribe, or company; e. g., _naku_ tena, na -te Urioteoro, _that is mine, the Urioteoro's_; i. e., the property of -my tribe. Keihea taua? _where are we two?_ i. e., where is our party, -ko ta _maua_ ki tena, ta te tangata Maori, _that is a phrase of us -(two) of the New Zealander_, i. e., of the New Zealanders. - - NOTE.--This form is often also used when the speaker wishes to - propound some remark which would appear harsh if too personal; e. g., - he aha kei _a maua ko Hone_, _what is with me and John_; i. e., oh, - never mind John: of what importance is he? - - Connected with this is a mode of phrase which we have been surprised - to hear questioned by some who claim a high character as Maori - scholars. - -Sec. 5. A pronoun in the singular will often be made to refer to a noun -in the plural; ko nga tangata _tenei_, _nana_ nga tikaokao, _this are -persons_, HIS _are the fowls_; nga tangata _nona_ te kainga, _the men_ -HIS _is the settlement_, i. e., whose is, &c.; nga tangata _nana_ i -patu, _the men_ HIS _was the having struck_; i. e., who struck. _Tenei -matou te_ noho atu nei, _this is we_, who _am sitting towards you_. - -Sec. 6. It is a very common thing in Maori to put into the third person a -pronoun which has reference to either the first or second; e. g., hei -rama aha? _tana_ koke noa atu,--_nana tana_ rakau, _a light for what -purpose?_--_his_ stumbling away--_his_ is _his_ own _stick_, i. e., -"What do I want of light?--I can stumble out my way--I am accustomed -to that kind of work;" ko te rangi mahi kai tenei ma _tona_ tinana, -_this is the day for procuring food for_ his _body_; i. e., for -ourselves; kei _tena_ tangata pea, _it rests perhaps with that -individual_; i. e., with you; _tona_ tangata kaha ko koe, _you are his -strong man_; i. e., what a very strong man you are! (ironically); -haere korua, e Hone, _raua_ ko Hemi, _go you (two) John, they two and -James_; i. e., go you and James. - - This last form is, perhaps, peculiar to the Waikato District. - -Sec. 7. When two or more individuals are connected in English by the -conjunction _and_, they will very frequently be denoted by the dual or -plural, of the personal pronoun of the more worthy person. For -example, _he_ and _I_ are denoted by _maua_, John and James by Hone -_raua_ ko Hemi, John, James, and Luke, by Hone, _ratou_ ko Hemi, ko -Ruka. - - In this construction the latter noun will be in the nominative, even - though the preceding be in an oblique case; e. g., te atawhai o te - Atua, _raua ko tana tamaiti, ko Ihu Karaiti_, the mercy of God and - His Son Jesus Christ. Here, though _Atua_ is in the possessive case, - _raua_ and tamaiti, and Ihu Karaiti are in the nominative. - - This strange, though in Maori very common, mode of construction - cannot, we believe, be explained in any other way than by an - epanorthosis. (Vide page 114, Sec. 3.) - -Sec. 8. The noun belonging to the pronoun is often omitted, especially in -talking of garments; e. g., keihea toku? _Where is mine_; i. e., my -garment. Tikina atu te tahi ki a koe, _fetch some for you_; i. e., -fetch some garment. Ko wai toku?--_Who is mine?_--i. e., my helper. - -Sec. 9. _The relative pronouns._--Following are some of the ways in which -the defect of the relative pronoun is supplied in Maori:--(1) Te -tangata _nana_ nga kakano _the man whose are the seeds_; (2) te -tangata _i_ nga kakano, _idem_; (3) te tangata i patu _nei_ i a Hone, -the man (_who_) struck John; _or_ (4) te tangata i patua _ai_ (_by -whom, on account of whom_), _he was beaten_; (5) Keihea, he poraka -_hei to_ i te rakau? _Where is there a block (with which) to drag the -log?_ (6) Keihea he haer_enga_? _where is there a place on which -(they, the cows) may run?_ (7) Ko tenei _taku_ i mate nui _ai_, _this -is_ MINE _desired_, i. e., this is _what_ I wished for; (8) te poaka i -patua e koe, the _pig (which) was killed by you_; (9) _kei reira_ te -pakaru, _kei reira_ te paru, _you must coat_ (with raupo) _all parts -of the house that are broken_. - -It will be seen in the preceding examples that the most common means -by which the want of the relative is supplied are by the preposition, -as in example 2; (2) by the particles _nei_, &c., and _ai_, as in -examples 3 and 4; (3) by the verbal noun, as in examples 5 and 6; (4) -by the possessive case with _ai_, as in example 7; (5) by the passive -voice, as in example 8. Occasionally, also, the personal pronouns, as -in example 1, or the adverb _reira_, as in example 9, &c., are used -for the same purpose. - -Sec. 10. _Demonstrative Pronouns._--(1) These, like the primitive -pronouns of Hebrew, are often used for the verb of existence; (2) and -the time will frequently be denoted by the pronoun used; i. e., Tenei -will mostly be used for the present tense; tena, (and most frequently) -tera, for the future, or past, and sometimes for the imperative mood; -e. g., e haere ana _tenei_ ahau, THIS _I am going_; i. e., I am going; -_tenei_ au, _here I am_; _tera_ e mate, _that will die_, i. e., he -will die; _tena_ taku pu maua mai, _that my gun bring here_; i. e., -bring my gun. - -The leading distinctions between tenei, tena, and tera, and also the -distinction between them and their resolved forms te--nei, &c., have -been mentioned, page 30. Instances, however, are not rare, in which -those distinctions seem to be disregarded; and others will occur which -it will require some experience and ingenuity to classify; e. g., I -_te_ po _nei_ implies that it has been already dark for some time; i -_tenei_ po may mean The night of this day. In the following, Kei hea -_te_ awa _nei_? (_where is the channel that we are seeking for?_) it -is clear _tenei_ could not be employed. - -(2.) Sometimes only _nei_ will be admitted into connexion with the -first person; (i. e., when the speaker is denoted as the person -looking at the object spoken of;) and _na_ into connexion with the -second. _Ra_ has for the most part a vague or general application.[37] -Thus a person, calling to a settlement, will say, Kahore he tangata i -te kainga nei? _Is there no one at that settlement?_ (at which I am -looking.) If addressing another who belongs to, or has seen, the -settlement, he will say, i te kainga _na_, (or _ra_) _at the -settlement which you see there, or to which you belong_, &c. Again. -Keihea nga kau? where are the cows? Kei _kona_ ano, _They are there -near you_. If he had said, Kei ko, we should have understood him to -mean, "They are off, away, in that direction;" na _kona_ mai, _come by -that direct path, in which you are_; na _ko_ mai, _come by that -circuitous one away there_. - -(3.) Nei, &c., in composition will frequently supply the place of the -relative; e. g., te taua i muru NEI i a Hone. - -(4.) Sometimes they will imply a conjunction, or will otherwise limit -the sentence in which they occur, by implying a connection with a -previous sentence or thing. Thus, kahore au i pai, means _I am not -willing_; kahore _nei_ ahau i pai will mean, _the reason was because I -was not willing_; or, _you know I was not_, &c., &c. Again, I a koutou -_e_ tatari _ana_ will denote a mere general remark, _while you are -waiting_, I a koutou e tatari _nei_ denotes _while you are_ THUS -_continuing to wait_; te wahine i whakarerea, _the woman who was -divorced_; te wahine i whakarerea _nei_, (or _ra_), _the woman who was -divorced under these_ (or _those_) _particular circumstances_, or, _on -that particular occasion_, &c., &c. - -_The Interrogative Pronouns._--_Wai_ and _aha_ are often used to add -intensity; _ma wai_ e noho, e au? _that I should remain is for whom?_ -i. e., I won't remain. _Ko wai_ hoki ka kite i te hoenga o tenei taua, -_maua nei_? _who saw the departure of this hostile party, we two?_ i. e., -we did not at all see this party's departure to fight with you; -hei _aha_ ma _wai_? _For what purpose is it, for whom?_ i. e., what -good at all is that for? kahore i rongo, kahore i aha, _he did not -attend, he did not what_; i. e., he did not at all listen; kahore aku -kupu, _me he aha, me he aha_, _I did not utter a word, if a what, if a -what_; i. e., I did not at all speak; ka hua ahau _he aha_, _I thought -it was a what_; i. e., I imagined it was something very important you -were going to talk about. Sometimes a personal pronoun will be -associated with an interrogative; e. g., ko _wai_ hoki _taua_ ka kite -atu? _Who, we two, can see it?_ i. e., who knows? - -[37] For _ra_ as an adverbial particle, vide page 92. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. - -SYNTAX OF THE VERB. - - -_Of the Verbal Particles._--The consideration of the verbal particles, -and of the other means by which a verb is modified in Maori, has been -reserved for the Syntax; chiefly because the investigation of those -subjects will involve also that of compound propositions, and of other -constructions which belong to this part of Grammar. - -_E_ (a) is sometimes used for the present, e. g., _e_ noho mai, _he is -sitting there close at hand_. (b) Most frequently it is joined with -_nei_, &c.; e. g., _e_ riri _nei_, _who is angry with me_, &c. (c) It -is sometimes used to denote the future; e. g., ko wai ma _e_ haere? -_who will_ go? He tokomaha _e_ mate, _many will die_. (d) It is -chiefly employed to denote contingency, or some future act on which -something else depends; e. g., _E_ riri ia, _if he be angry_; _E_ tae -mai a Hone tonoa ake, _If John comes here send him after me_; _E_ hau, -_if there be a wind_. - - NOTE.--(1.) In such constructions as the last, it will be found that - the latter verb will generally, except when it is in the imperative - mood, be in the second person. In the following sentence, for - example, _E_ muri ka puta mai nga kuri ka puhia, _henceforward if - dogs come here they will be shot_, _e_ is wrongly used; puhia being - in the third person. To this rule, however, there are exceptions. - - (2.) There is a difference between _e_ and _ka_, as particles of the - future; _ka_ being of much more extensive use; i. e., being used with - all persons, and in all senses, whether absolute or contingent; vid. - _ka_. - - (3.) There are, however, some constructions in which _e_ is always - preferred; chiefly, we believe, when the verb is preceded by some - word with which it is in connexion; i. e., when it is preceded by the - negative adverb _kore_, and sometimes _kahore_; e. g., ka _kore_ e - pai, _if he is not willing_; _kahore e_ tangi _she did not at all - cry_,--by the preposition _ma_; e. g., _ma_ wai _e_ hanga? _who is to - build it?_--and by _no_ (sometimes), _nohea e wera?_ _Whence_, i. e., - _why should it take fire?_--by the pronouns _tera_ and _ehea_; e. g., - _tera e_ mate, he will die perhaps, ko _ehea e_ patua, _which are to - be killed?_--by the noun or pronoun in the possessive case - (sometimes); e. g., _taku e_ pai ai _that which I like_, he aha tau e - tohe? what are you importuning about?--by _taihoa_ and _taria_; e. - g., _taihoa e_ haere _wait going_; i. e., _don't go for a while_. - - N.B.--For the distinction between _e_ and _ka_, when prefixed to - numerals; vid., numerals, chap. 17, sec. 5. - -(e.) For _e_ as prefixed to the imperative mood, vid. page 40 (c). It -is generally omitted in that mood, when the verb is followed by _atu_, -_mai_, _ake_, _iho_, _&c._ - -_Ana_ is a particle corresponding, in many particulars, with _ka_. It -is most frequently employed, however, in the continuation of a -narrative, and does not often except in abrupt and animated discourse, -occupy a place in the leading clause of the sentence. - -The following examples illustrate this last remark. Ki te kahore e -homai, ina _haere ana_ ahau, ka riro. _If it is not given, certainly -going I will depart_; ko nga tangata o Taranaki, _aia ana_ e matou ki -te maunga, _the men of Taranaki, driven were they by us to the -mountain_. It will be seen that the verb preceding in the above -clauses gives a larger measure of emphasis than if another word had -gone before it. In such animated sentences, as the above, the speaker -will generally prefer _ana_ to any other verbal particle. But another -leading use of _ana_ is to denote a continuance of action. The -following extract from a translation of the first eight chapters of -Genesis, made some years since by the Church Missionaries, will serve -as an illustration of this, and our other remarks on this particle. -We may add that, though we suggest a few trifling alterations in the -part quoted, yet, considering the time in which it was made, it is -very creditable to the Maori knowledge of the translators. - - Ch. 1, v. i. I te orokomeatanga i hanga e te Atua te rangi me te - whenua. - - 2. A kihai whai ahua te whenua, i takoto kau; a ngaro ana i te pouri - te mata o te hohonu. Haerere ana te Wairua o te Atua ki runga ki te - mata o nga wai. - - 3. Mea ana te Atua, Kia marama; a kua marama. - - 4. A kite ana te Atua i te marama, pai ana; wehea ana e te Atua te - marama i te pouri. - - 5. A huaina ana e te Atua te marama, hei ao. - -In the first verse _ana_ can have no place, it would give an -unpleasant jerk, as well as the appearance of levity, to a -commencement so methodical and dignified. Our translators, therefore, -with good taste, employed _i_; I te timatanga _i_ hanga, &c. In the -second verse, however, in the clause commencing _a ngaro ana, &c._, it -is very correctly used; because there is a close connection between -_that clause_ and the one preceding. In the third verse it is, we -think, injudiciously used, because a new subject is now commenced. We -should, therefore, have preferred _na_ KA _mea_ te Atua. So also in -the commencement of the fourth verse, _A kite ana te Atua_ i te -marama, pai ana. We should prefer, a _ka_ kite, &c. Pai _ana_ is, we -think, objectionable. It is too abrupt, and unconnected, and makes the -_pai_ refer to the _atua_, rather than to _marama_. _E_ pai _ana_, -perhaps, or _he mea pai_, would be preferable. _E--ana_ is strictly -the sign of the present tense; e. g., _e_ kai _ana_, _he is eating_. -Sometimes when it follows a past time its meaning will also be past; -as may be seen in our remarks on _ana_ (vid. also page 38, and our -remarks on compound times). - -_Ka_ is a particle of very extensive use. It is sometimes employed to -denote the present tense; e. g., ka pai, _it is good_. It is the -particle most frequently used in historic presents (vid. John iv., 1, -3, and N. T. _passim_). It is very frequently used to denote future -events, and is often employed in hypothetic, or contingent -propositions; e. g., _ka_ mate koe i a au; _you will be killed by me_, -_ka_ haere ahau _ka_ riri a Hone, IF _I go, John will be angry_. - - NOTE.--_Ka_, as a particle of the present, will often differ in - meaning from _e--ana_. For example, ka tere te waka may signify _the - canoe will drift_, or _that it_ DRIFTS; _e_ tere _ana_, that _it is - drifting_. - -For the distinctions between _ka_ and _e_ vid. _e_. Occasionally _ka_ -is followed by _te_. Vid. two examples page 57. - -_I_, a particle of the past time; vid. _kua_. - -(a.) Sometimes, however, it is employed to denote the present; e. g., -_koia_ i riri _ai_, _for that cause is he angry?_ _na_ te aha koe _i_ -tohe _ai_ kia haere, _why do you persist in going?_ Ka tahi ano to -hanganga _i_ pai, _this house (which I am now roofing) is now, for the -first time, properly done_. - -(b.) Sometimes _i_ is employed where contingency is designed; -e. g., he aha koa i pono he titaha, he titaha; i pono he hate, he hate -_well, it won't signify_. _If an axe happens to be (my payment) -let it so happen_ (lit. let it be an axe). _If a shirt, &c._ - -Ka whiua to tahi wahi ki tahaki, hei whakahere i tona Atua. _I_ whiua -ranei ki te wahi tapu ranei; _i_ whiua ranei ki te wahi noa ranei, _he -throws a portion to one side as an offering to his God_. _It may have -been thrown_ (i. e., it matters not whether it is thrown) _upon a -sacred spot, or upon a spot not sacred_. - -_Kua_, the sign of the past tense; e. g., _kua_ korero atu ahau ki a -ia, _I have spoken to him_. - -(a.) The leading distinction between _kua_ and _i_ is, we believe, -that _kua_ is unlimited (i. e., will not admit of limitation), and _i_ -limited in construction; and that the former, when it precedes in the -sentence, will be often found to correspond to the perfect, the -latter to the imperfect of English; e. g., _kua_ kitea te mea _i_ -kimihia e koe? HAS _the thing been found that_ WAS _sought for by -you?_ _Kua_ ora koe? Kahore, I ora ano au; a, hoki mai ana te mate; -_have you recovered? No, I did recover, but the sickness has -returned_. - - N.B.--It would, however, be very incorrect to affirm, as have some - good Maori scholars, that _kua_ always corresponds to the perfect, - and _i_ to the imperfect. - -In accordance with the preceding remarks, it may be observed, 1st, -that _kua_ is seldom used when the verb is preceded by the _cause_, -_time_, or other qualifying circumstance of the action; i. e., when -the verb is followed by _ai_. For example, we might say _kua_ patua, -_he was killed_; but we could not say, te take _kua_ patua _ai_, _the -cause for which he was killed_; neither would it be correct to say, -koia _kua_ riri _ai_ ia, _for that cause was he angry_. 2dly. It will -also, we believe, be found that, in secondary clauses, in which the -relative is understood, _i_ obtains a much more general use than -_kua_. For example, in the following sentence,--"enei mea _kua_ -korerotia e koutou," we should prefer _i_ korerotia. 3dly. _Kua_ will -seldom, when denoting the perfect or imperfect tenses, be found -associated with the particle _ko_; e. g., we very seldom hear _ko_ -Hone _kua_ haere, _it was John who went_. In the following sentence, -we disapprove of the use of both of these particles:--e pai ana matou -ki a ia, no te mea _ko_ ia _kua_ atawhai mai ki a matou, _we love him, -because he was kind to us_. We should have preferred _mona i_ atawhai, -&c.[38] (4.) When a preposition immediately precedes, _kua_ will -seldom be employed to denote the tenses; e. g., nonahea _i_ mate ai; -_Since what time_, or, _at what time did he die?_ Nana ano _i_ haere -noa mai, _he came of himself_. - -(5.) _Kua_ is never used after the negative adverbs kahore, kihai, and -kiano; e. g., kahore ahau i rongo, _I have not heard_; kiano _i_ mate -noa, _he has not yet died_. - -(6.) The following, also, are constructions in which _kua_ will be -found to give place to _i_: _Me_ koutou hoki i whakarere _i_ to koutou -kainga, _as ye also left your country_; _me i_ kahore koe, _if it had -not been for you_, _&c._ - -In the following constructions, however, _kua_ is prefixed: _penei -kua_ ora, _in that case he would have lived_; _ano kua_ mate, _as if -he were dead_; _me te_ mea _kua_ waruhia, _as if it had been planed_; -_Me_ i kahore koe _kua_ mate au, _if it had not been for you, I should -have died_. In the following, however, _i_ is preferred: _me_ i kahore -koe _i_ ora ai ahau, _If it had not been for you, (the cause) why I -was saved_; i. e., I should have been lost, but for you. - -(b.) _Kua_ is sometimes employed where a present would be used in -English; e. g., _kua_ mate, _he is dead_; _kua_ po, _it is dark_, or, -is past sunset; _kua_ riro, _he is gone_. - -(c.) In animated narrations of past events, _kua_ is sometimes -employed to give variety; e. g., te taenga atu o Hone, _kua_ mau ki te -hamanu, e tatua ana, te tino haerenga, _so John goes, he_ HAS _taken -(his) cartouch box, (he) is girding it on; the instant marching_. - -(d.) Sometimes, also, when the speaker wishes to convey the idea of a -certain, and speedy accomplishment, he will (as did the Hebrews) -employ the past tense; e. g., E pa, he aha i kaiponuhia ai to waru? -_kua_ whakahokia mai apopo, _Father why do you withhold your plane? It -will_ SURELY _be returned to you to-morrow_; E hoa, reia atu; _kua_ -hoki mai koe, _Friend, run (and tell them) you will be back (in quite -time enough)_; e noho ana tenei; _kua_ pata iho te ua, e rere ana ki -rote ki te whare, _we are sitting here, but, immediately as soon as it -rains, we run into the house_. - -(e.) Kua is often prefixed to denote an action which is to take place, -or has taken place previous to something else--in which latter use it -will sometimes correspond to the pluperfect of English; e. g., _I_ a -koe _kua_ riro, _after you had gone_. Mo te ara rawa ake _kua_ maoa, -_that, exactly as he awakes, it may have been cooked_; i. e., _it may -be cooked against he awakes_. Me i noho _kua_ wha na rakau e toia, _if -I had remained, four logs would have been dragged_. Akuanei mau nga -riwai _kua_ kainga, _presently, the potatoes that have been first -eaten will be yours_; i. e., your crop will be the soonest ripe. Huatu -_ko_ tena _kua_ ngakia, _no, but let that be first dug_. - -Vid. our remarks on _ko_, when associated with _kua_ (note to _a_) (3). - - NOTE.--The student will see, in the above examples, that _kua_, when - employed in this sense, will often enter into combinations which - would not be admitted under other tenses. - -KIA.--This particle has been already considered, as far as it is -connected with the imperative mood (vid. page 40). There are, however, -other uses of it, which are both varied and important. - -(a.) It may, in asking a question, be used for the future; e. g., Kia -haere ahau? Ne? Shall I go? shall I? - -(b.) It may, also, be found where an hypothetic statement is made, or -an expectation, or other reference to some future event, is implied--a -use in which it will sometimes be found to correspond to the second -future indicative and perfect potential of English; e. g., E noho ki -konei; _kia_ hoki mai ra ano ahau, _stop here until I shall have -returned_; _Kia_ titiro atu matou, ka patua to matou hoa, hei reira ka -whakatika atu matou, _let us have seen_ (i. e., if we had but seen) -_him strike our friend, we should then have risen_; me noho _kia_ ora, -ka haere, _you had better remain, and when you are well, depart_; e -hoe katoa ana ratou, _kia_ oti te waka o Nini, _they are all going -when Nini's canoe is finished_; I raro ahau e whakarongo mai ana, _kia -mate, kia_ mate; a ka ora noa ano, _I was at the northward waiting for -news from here of his death; but he has recovered_. - -(c.) Often, when intensity of _negation_, _doubt_, _&c._, is intended, -it will be used instead of the proper particles of the present, past, -and future; e. g., hore rawa _kia_ tika, _by no means is it correct_; -kahore _kia_ kotahi, _not even one_; Ko au _kia_ mate, ko ia _kia_ -ora? _must I (by feeding this pig) starve, while he has food?_ Kahore -ano _kia_ haere noa! _not yet gone!_ - -(2.) It is often found, also, in exclamations of wonder; e. g., _Kia_ -nui! _How large!_ - -(3.) In the same sense, also, it is used where an infinitive would be -employed in the learned languages; particularly where _contempt_, -_disregard_, &c., are denoted; e. g., Kia whakarongo atu ahau ki o -korero hei aha? why should I listen to your talk? lit. _that I should -listen to your talk is for what?_ _Kia_ ho atu taku poaka mo tena! -_that I should give my pig for that!_ i. e., I will not give it. - -(d.) _Kia_ is frequently employed to denote the infinitive; e. g., -haere _kia_ kite, _go to see_. - -(e.) It will also be employed when the latter verb is an amplification -of the meaning of a preceding one; e. g., ahea hanga ai tou whare, -_kia oti_? _When will your house be built, that it may be finished?_ -Te tangata e whiuwhiu ana i ana tikaokao, _kia wawe te mate_! _The man -who is pelting his fowls that they may be soon dead!_ Tanutanu rawa -_kia_ ngaro, _bury, bury deep, that it may be concealed_; (a song.) -Whiua, _kia_ mamae, _beat it that it may be pained_; na koutou _i_ aki -mai _kia_ tata, _it was you who pressed forward so as to be near_. - - NOTE.--There is a distinction between _kia_ and _ki te_, when - prefixed to a verb in the infinitive, which should be noticed. KIA is - very seldom prefixed to a verb in the active voice,--_ki te_ almost - always; e. g., Haere _ki te_ to i te waka. We could not say _kia to_. - -(2.) _Kia_ is almost always prefixed to the passive verb; _ki te_ very -seldom; e. g., Tikina atu _kia_ tirohia is _fetch it to be seen_. -Tikina atu _ki te_ titiro is _fetch him to look at it_. The following -sentence is erroneous:--arahina _ki te_ patu, led to be killed. It -should be _kia_ patua, or e arahina e patua ana. - -Sometimes, before neuter verbs, either _kia_ or _ki te_ will be -employed; e. g., I mea ahau kia, (or ki te) haere. - -Kia will most frequently be used when the former of the two verbs is -in the passive voice. Verbs following adjectives, by which _ability_, -_habit_, _&c._, are denoted, will take _ki te_; e. g., uaua _ki te_ -mahi, _strong to work_; e kino _ki te_ tahae, _is displeased at -thieving_. - -Between the uses of _kia_ and _ki te_ there may be often a very -material difference; e. g., e riri ana _ki te ata noho_ means _that -he is angry at the stopping quiet_,--i. e., that he wishes for war; e -riri ana _kia_ ata noho, means that _he is repressing (them) that they -may stop quiet_; ka tohe ki a maua _kia_ waru i te kai i te ra tapu, -_they pressed us to scrape food on the Sunday_. If it had been, Ka -tohe ki _te_ waru, &c., the speaker would have implied _that they_ -(the persons toheing) _persisted in scraping, &c._ - -Some foreigners seem remarkably careless in the use of this particle. -We subjoin a few instances in which it has been omitted, or introduced -erroneously. Ko tana hanga _kia_ korero, _his custom was to speak, -&c._; it should be, _he_ korero. E kore ahau e ahei _kia_ mea atu; it -should be, ahei _te_ mea atu. Ko te aroha e whakahauhau ana i te -tangata _hei_ mahi; it should be, _ki te_ mahi. Whakatika _hei_ patu; -it should be, whakatika _ki te_ patu, or whakatika atu, _patua_. - -It may be here observed that (1) some verbs have a partiality for -certain particles; e. g., hua _noa_ ahau, or, _ka_ hua ahau, _I -thought_; e kore _e_ ahei _te_ patu. (2.) Some verbs very rarely take -any verbal particle into connexion with them. Of this sort are heoi, -or heoti, kati, taihoa, penei (_in that case_), and, sometimes, -rokohanga, or rokohina. - -(3.) Many constructions will be met with in which the verbal particle -is omitted. (a.) A common adverb of quantity or quality following the -verb will often cause the verbal particle to be dispensed with. (b.) -It is also omitted in constructions like the following:--_meake_ -haere; whano mate; kei te ata haere ai; taihoa maua haere atu; &c. -(c.) In animated discourse, the common verb will sometimes be used -without any kind of auxiliary; e. g., kaiponu noa ia, kaiponu noa, -_tangohia_ e au. _Withhold it, withhold it as he might, yet I took it -away._ - -AI.--The Aborigines sometimes appear to vary in their use of this -particle; some introducing it into sentences in which others would -omit it. These instances, however, may, we believe, be reduced to one -class:--viz., to that in which _ai_ is used in connexion with _kia_. - -When _kia_ is prefixed to a verb which is merely an explanation, or -some other enlargement of the meaning of a preceding one, it will -seldom take _ai_ after it; as may be seen in our examples of _kia_, -(rules _d_ and _e_). But when the _intention_, _cause_, _&c._, are to -be specifically denoted, then _ai_ will be used. Thus, in the -following sentence, haere kia kite, _go to see_, _kite_ is a plainly -natural effect of _haere_, and _ai_, therefore, is omitted. If, -however, some unusual act is to be done that he might see, then _ai_, -most probably, would be employed; thus, e piki ki runga ki te rakau -kia kite _ai_ koe, _climb up the tree_ THAT _you_ MAY _see_. The -distinction is the same as that between the two following in -English:--_go_ AND _see_; _climb_ THAT _you may see_. Again, in the -last example of kia (rule _e_), na koutou i aki mai kia tata, -"nearness" is a natural effect of "pressing forward," even though they -had no specific intention of being near: _ai_, therefore, is not used. -If, however, the speaker wished to say _ye pressed forward_ THAT _I -might be angry_, he would employ _ai_; kia riri _ai_ ahau; because -here we have two acts, not necessarily connected, and one specifically -performed to produce the other. - -The following are a few out of the many instances that might be -adduced of the erroneous introduction, and erroneous omission, of this -particle:--e kore koe e pohehe me ratou, _kia_ roa _ai_ taku -korerotanga, _you are not ignorant (as they are), that I should be -long explaining it to you_; it should be, _e roa ai_. As it stands it -means, YOU WILL NOT MAKE YOURSELF "POHEHE," IN ORDER THAT, &c. Aua e -whakaara ake i tetahi rakau _kia_ tu _ai_, _erect not any stick that -it may stand_; it should be rakau, _tu ai_. Kihai i tonoa kia uia -_ai_ matou, _he was not sent to question us_; it should be, _ki te_ ui -i a matou. Ko nga mutunga o ia waiata, o ia waiata, kia whakahuatia -_ai_ tenei waiata, _at the end of each song let this chant be -repeated_. As this stands, its meaning is, _in order that this chant -may be repeated_; it should be, _kia_ whakahuatia tenei, &c., or _ka_ -whakahua _ai_. Ka puta te kupu o Hone _kia_ haere atu _ai_ ratou, when -John speaks, let them proceed; it should be, me haere, &c., or ka -haere. A wrong use of this particle may often seriously misrepresent -the meaning of the speaker. For example, if we were to say, e inoi ana -ahau _kia_ murua _ai_ oku hara, we should mean, _I pray that (in -consideration of my prayer) my sins may be forgiven_. Prayer, here, is -made the immediate and effective means by which this end is obtained. -If a Native were to say, "E inoi ana ahau kia homai _ai_ tetahi -paraikete," absurd as would be the remark, it would mean that the -blanket is to be given to him, not as a favor, or as due on other -grounds, but simply as a _reward_ for _his asking_. The Bible tells us -of another consideration, by which pardon is obtained, and prayer -answered; and, therefore, in such passages as the above, we must -carefully abstain from _ai_. Koia nga tamariki a Hone i haere tahi me -ratou; it should be, i haere tahi _ai_. E kore ia e poka ke i tana i -mea; it should be, i mea _ai_; te tangata _i_ he _ai_, the man who had -committed the offence. In Waikato this will mean, _the man through -whom they had erred_; it should have been, _te tangata nona te he_. - -(a.) _Whaka._--The leading property of this particle is _causative_; -e. g., _tu_ is _to stand_, whakatu is _to cause to stand_ (vid. etiam, -page 50, under pai, kau, and kakahu, and Syntax of Numbers, under -Ordinals). - - NOTE.--In this use of it, adjectives, and neuter verbs, will be - converted into active verbs; e. g., toe, _to be left_; whakatoe, _to - put by, as a leaving_; e. g., _whaka_toea etahi ma mea ma, _put by - some for our friends_. - - In the following example, the adjective is made improperly to retain - the form of a neuter verb, he mea _whakapirau i te_ hau, _a thing - blasted by the wind_. Its meaning, as its stands, is, _a thing that - destroys the wind_. - - Considerable variety may sometimes be found in the nature of the - causation implied by this prefix. Thus, puru, _to cork (a bottle, - &c.)_. Whakapurua nga pounamu, _to stow, or pack (with straw, &c., - between) them_. Waha, _to carry on the back_; whakawaha, _to take up - the load on the back_; e. g., waiho atu e au e whakawaha ana, _as I - came away they were loading themselves with their burdens_. - -(b.) Sometimes it will imply the _becoming_, or the _being like to_, -or the _feigning_, or _exhibiting the_ root to which it is prefixed. -Frequently, also, it will indicate an _origin_ or _propriety_ in the -root; e. g., Kei te _whaka_riwai a Hone i roto i te rua, _John is -making himself potatoes_, i. e., (is occupying the place of) _in the -rua_ (or potatoe house); ka po, ka _whaka_ahi; ka awatea, ka -_whaka_kapua, _at night it became a fire, by day it became a cloud_; -kia _whaka_tangata, _to act like a man_; ka riro, ka _whaka_-Hone ki -te wai, _he will be off, and become like John in the water_; i. e., -will be drowned as John was; he kupu _whaka_-te-Kanaua, _a speech made -by Kanaua_; i. e., any promise, &c., made by him; he tangata -_whaka_-Ngapuhi, _a person belonging to, or that frequently visits_ -Ngapuhi; he aha kei to tatou hoa? Kahore pea. E _whaka_matemate noa -iho ana, kia kiia e mate ana, _What is the matter with our friend? -Nothing at all. He is feigning sickness, that he may be regarded as -unwell._ - -(c.) Sometimes it will denote _reciprocity_; e. g., ko ratou -_whaka_ratou hoki, _he is one of themselves_! (d.) Sometimes it will -denote an action either _inceptive_ or _gradually declining_; e. g., e -_whaka_tutuki ana te tai, _the tide is beginning to get full_; e -_whaka_hemohemo ana, _he is sinking_; i. e., is on the point of death. -(e.) Sometimes it will denote _towards_; vide page 71. (f.) -Occasionally it will indicate some action corresponding to the sense -of the root; e. g., ka _whaka_-ahiahi ratou, _they act at sunset_; i. e., -they wait for sunset to make their assault. - -_The other auxiliaries of the verb._--These, it has been already -observed, are adverbs, prepositions, pronouns, and the articles _he_ -and _te_, placed in connection with the verb. We proceed to make a few -remarks upon them, and some other forms which the Maori verb -occasionally assumes:-- - -_On the adverbs as auxiliaries._--These chiefly are the adverbs of -intensity and negation; we may add, also, the particles atu, mai, ake, -iho. - -The adverbs of intensity, as well as the last mentioned particles, -will frequently lose their distinctive force, and either in some way -modify the meaning; i. e., denote _rapidity_ and _certainty_ of -_effect_, _succession_ or _connection_ of events, &c., or be -redundant. The following examples will, it is hoped, sufficiently -illustrate their use:--te whakaarahanga ake o te ra, tahuri _tonu -iho_, the putting up of the sail _forthwith_ was it upset; akuanei, -_ahiahi noa_, ka tata ta maua te oti, _presently_ BY SUNSET _ours will -be near being finished_; mo te ara _rawa ake_ o nga tamariki kua maoa, -THAT EXACTLY _as_ THE _children awake it may have been cooked_; i. e., -_it may be cooked before they awake_; kahore, ha, he kainga; -_kainga[39] rawa atu_ ki Waitoke, _oh, there is no settlement_ (in the -interval); _the nearest settlement is Waitoke_; tia _rawa_ ki te -raukura, pani _rawa_ ki te kokowai, _he braided his hair with -feathers, and besmeared himself with red ochre_; _te tino_ haerenga, -so on _they started_. - - N.B.--Between _noa ake_ and _noa atu_ a distinction will sometimes be - found not unlike that which obtains between the perfect and imperfect - of English. _Noa ake_ will generally convey an allusion to some date, - either present or past; _noa atu_ will most frequently refer to the - past, without any such allusion; e. g., kua mate, _noa ake_, _he has - been dead this some time_; kua mate _noa atu_, _he died a long time - ago_; kua maoa, _noa ake_ te kai, _the food has been this long time - cooked_; kua maoa _noa atu_, _it was cooked a long time ago_; kua mate - _noa ake_ i reira, _he had been dead then some time_; kua mate _noa - atu_ i reira, _he had been dead a long time previous to that date_. - -For further illustrations of the adverbs as auxiliaries the student is -referred to chapter 9, pages 78, 79, &c. For the negative adverbs, as -employed with the verb, vid. next chapter. - -_Of the Prepositions._--The use of these as auxiliaries is to supply -the place of the verb substantive when no verb is expressed in the -sentence; e. g., _naku_ tenei, _this is mine_; _kei_ hea? _where is -it?_ _I_ a au i runga, _when I was at the Southward_. The tenses they -denote, and those also which they admit after them, have been -mentioned, chapter 8. Other notices respecting them will be found in -the next chapter. For the pronouns as auxiliaries, vid. page 35.[40] - -_Verbs which assume the form of a noun._--It has been already observed -that Maori inclines to the substantive form; and that such is only -natural will be obvious to anyone who will reflect that it is more -easy for an unpolished mind to conceive of things as existences, than -to trace them through the various modifications of act denoted in a -verb. In many instances, indeed, a New Zealander is compelled to adopt -this form, in consequence of the Maori verb not supplying any -satisfactory form for the infinitive mood, and the participles. That -these two parts of speech strongly partake of the nature of a noun is -well known; and we may therefore be prepared to find the forms for -denoting them in Maori exhibit a mixed character; i. e., to be a kind -of compound of the verb and the noun. It may be added, also, that, as -in some Latin authors, the infinitive mood is often used for the -finite verb;[41] so also, in Maori, will the verbal noun, especially -when a brief and animated mode of diction is desired, be found very -frequently to occupy the place of the verb. - -The following examples illustrate the various modes in which the Maori -verb adopts the substantive form. - -The student will observe that even passive verbs will submit to the -same operation, and receive the sign of the substantive, (viz. the -article) before them; e. g., Tenei au _te tu_ atu nei, _here am I_ THE -_standing towards (you)_; he kainga hou _te rapua_ nei, _a new country -is the being sought_, i. e., is what we are seeking for; ko koe _te_ -korerotia nei, it is _you who are the being talked about_; _he noho_ -aha tau? _what are you sitting for?_ kua oti _te keri_, _it is -finished, the being dug_; ka tata ahau _te patua_ e koe, _I am near, -the being beaten by you_; he mohio koe? _are you a knowing?_ i. e., do -you know anything about it? - -The following are examples of _the verbal noun as used for the finite -verb_:--me he mea _ko te mahuetanga_ o to matou waka, _if it had been -the leaving of our canoe_, i. e., if our canoe had been left to us; -kei riri mai ia ki te kai; _te taunga_ iho--ko ia, ko tana waka, _lest -he (the God) be angry at the food (not having been given)--the -alighting (upon him, the priest), &c._, i. e., and should then alight -upon him, &c.; haere atu ana a Rona ki _te kawe_ wai, Ka pouri. _Te -kanganga_ ki te marama. Te _tino tikinga_ iho nei, ka tae ki a Rona, -_Rona_ (the man in the moon) _goes to fetch water. It is dark. The -cursing at the moon. The instant coming down to him, &c._, i. e., he -cursed at the moon, and she in anger came down to him. - - NOTE.--More examples of this very animated mode of narration might be - easily adduced. The student will find several others scattered - throughout this work. We may observe, also, that the very frequent - use of this form by the natives constitutes one remarkable feature by - which the language, as spoken by him, differs from that spoken by the - foreigner. - -As a further illustration of the way in which predication in Maori is -sometimes performed by the substantive, the following forms may be -mentioned:--_he mea whakamaori_ no te reo pakeha, _a thing translated -from the foreigner's tongue_, i. e., it was translated from, &c. Na -Hone tenei, _he mea ho atu na_ Pita,--_this is John's, it was -presented to him by Pita_: lit. it was a thing presented, &c. Akuanei, -he _noho atu te otinga_, _presently a remaining away will be the end_, -i. e., (we shall find that) he will remain away. - -It should be also noted that the following verbs always take the -substantive form after them, viz., hohoro, oti, hei, and ahei, pau, -taea, tau, timata, heoi ano, kati, poto; e. g., timata _te mahi_, -_commence to work_; kati _te tahae_, _stop thieving, &c._ - - NOTE.--These verbs, it would appear, deserve most justly the - appellation of "auxiliaries," 1st, as they are real verbs; and 2ndly, - as by their help we can approximate to many forms of the verb in - other languages. For example, kua _oti te tiki_, mai, _has been_ - fetched hence; e kore e _ahei te korero_, cannot _divulge_. - -The use of the verbal noun, it would appear, is very prevalent in -Oriental languages (vid. Lee Heb. Gram., second edition, p.p. 75 and -76, and Carey's Gram. of the Burman, also Humboldt on the Chinese, as -there quoted.) The following form, however, will often be found in -Maori to supersede it. - -A noun, or pronoun, in the oblique case, will, frequently, in Maori, -take the finite verb after it;[42] e. g., e whakapono ana ahau ki a -_ia i mate_ i a _Ponotio Pirato_. - -The expression "ki tana hekenga atu ki te reinga" is precisely the -same as "ki a ia i heke atu ki, &c." Again, _Noku i haere_ mai nei, -_since I arrived here_: lit., _from or of me_ (I mean) _came here_; ko -te rua tenei o nga wiki _o Hone, i hoki ai_, _this is the second week -since John returned_: lit., _this is the second week of John_ (I mean) -_returned_; _i a ia e ngaro ana_, _whilst he is hid_; _mo ratou_ -kahore _i rongo_, _because they would not obey_: lit., _for them_ (I -mean) _their not having obeyed_. - -Often, also, a noun, which, in English, would be in the nominative, -will, in Maori, be converted into the possessive; the verb following -as in the preceding rule; e. g., _naku i patu_, _I struck_: lit., _it -was mine_ (I mean) _the having struck it_; _maku e korero_, _I will -speak_: lit., _it will be for me_ (I mean) _the speaking_. - - It was most probably, through ignorance of this, and the preceding - rule, that some good Maori speakers adopted the following very - unsatisfactory analysis of the two examples first adduced:--"Naku i - patu," they would translate, _it was struck by me_; "maku e korero," - _it shall be spoken by me_; and they thus explain them: _Na_ and _ma_ - mean _by_; and _patu_ and _korero_, though active in _form_, are - passive in _meaning_. To this theory, however, there are strong - objections. (1.) It cannot be shewn, except by examples derived from - this class, that _na_ and _ma_ ever signify _by_; these words all must - admit are the active form of _no_ and _mo_--the prepositions which - denote the possessive case. (2.) It will altogether fail in those - instances in which other prepositions, besides _na_ and _ma_ are - found. In the following, for example:--"i a au e noho ana i reira," - _whilst I was sitting there_; nona i tango, _because he took it_, it - will be seen that it is as difficult to determine the nominatives of - "noho" and "tango" as it was to determine those of patu and korero in - the other examples. Those who attend to the genius of the language - (vid. preliminary remarks, pages 102 and 103, and Syntax of Nouns, - sec. 3, page 114) will, we think, find but little difficulty in the - question. They will see that there are no participles, adverbs, or - relative pronouns, in Maori, and that, therefore, we must not be - surprised at a construction which, though loose, is admirably adapted - to supply the defect. That Maori has a peculiar love for the - possessive form in predication, especially when a relative pronoun is - understood, may be seen in the following examples[43]:--ko Tiaki anake - _ta matou i kite_, _Tiaki was the only person that we saw_: lit., - Tiaki was our only one (actively) (I mean) saw; ka tohe ki _tana i pai - ai_, _he holds out for what he desired_: lit., he holds out for his (I - mean) desired; he mate _toku_, _I am sick_: lit., a sickness is mine; - ka tika _tau_, you are right: lit., yours is right; _koe_ would not be - here used; ko _taku noho_ tenei, a, po noa, _I will sit here till - night_: lit., this is my sitting until night. - -The leading meaning of _na_, and _ma_, and their corresponding -passives _no_, and _mo_, seems to be, of the one class, _present_, or -_past_, of the other _future possession_. And most of the examples -given in p.p. 63-67, of their various uses might be reduced to those -heads. Thus, "_no_ te mane i haere mai ai," means, literally, _it was -of the Monday_, (I mean,) _having come_. "_No_ reira i riri," it was -_of that cause_ (I mean,) _the having been angry_; _mo_ a mua haere -ai, _let it be for a future period_, (I mean,) _the going_, &c. - -_Compound tenses._[44]--A compound tense is one whose time and -quality are modified by some other time or circumstance with which it -is connected. - -Thus in the examples in page 38 _me i reira_ ahau _e_ pai _ana_, -_e_--_ana_, which taken _absolutely_, is present, now represents the -pluperfect potential; because it has a reference to _i reira_, a past -time, and to _me_, a particle denoting contingency. Again, in the -example, "akuanei tae rawa atu _kua_ mate; _kua_, taken absolutely, -refers to past time; but, here, it is taken _relatively_, and refers -to a future; i. e. to the time in which I may arrive; the sentence -meaning, literally, "presently, exactly as I shall have arrived, he is -dead." The expression _shall have been dead_, in English, all will -see, is a compound tense of a similar character, for it is compounded -of a future, and a past tense, and thus represents a _second future_. - -We proceed to lay before the student some examples of the most -important combinations of time and mood. To exhibit all that are -possible would extend our work beyond its prescribed limits. Some -remarks on this subject have been already made in treating on the -verbal particles. - - -INDICATIVE MOOD. - -_Present._--_Ka_ taka ki hea, _e_ haere mai _ana_? _they have reached -what place as they come along?_ - -_Imperfect tense._--_Rokahanga_ atu e au, _i re_ira _e_ noho _ana_, -_when I arrived he was sitting there_: lit., he is sitting, &c. _I_ -mua _e_ pai _ana_, _formerly I liked_ (it): lit., I like, &c. _E_ pai -_ana i_ mua--id. _I_ pai ano _i_ mua--id. _Na_ reira _i_ kore ai ahau -_e_ pai, _that was the cause why I did not assent_: lit., thence _was_ -I not, (I mean) _am_ pleased. _I_ ki hoki ia, a _kua_ oti; _i_ mea atu -ia, a, tu _tonu iho_, _he spake, and it was done; he commanded and it -stood fast_. _Heoi_ ahau me tenei tamaiti, _ka_ haere mai; _I was the -size of this child when I came here_. - -_I hea_ koe i mua, _ka_ kimi? _where were you before that you did not -look for it?_ - -Nei hoki, _kua_ ora, haere _ana_ ki Taranaki, _but he recovered, and -went to Taranaki_; _kua_ mea atu ra hoki; _e_ ki mai _ana_, _why I -said so, he replies_, i. e., _replied_. - -_Perfect tense._--_Ka_ wha nga wiki _e_ ngaro _ana_, (or _ka_ ngaro -_nei_;) _it has been lost these last four weeks_: lit., _these_ ARE -_four weeks_ IT IS _lost_. - -_I_ konei te kuri _e_ kai _ana_, mei te huruhuru, _a dog has been -eating a fowl here, as we may judge from the feathers_. _No_ku _ka_ -mate, _since I have been poorly_. - -_Pluperfect tense._--_Kihai_ i hinga _ka_ waiho e korua, _it had not -fallen when you left it_, lit., it did not fall, you leave it. _I_ a -koe _kua_ riro, _after you had gone_, (vid. our remarks on _kua_, -page 153 for other examples.) - -_First future tense._--_Ma_ Ngatiwhatua _e_ takitaki to maua mate, ka -ea, _Ngatiwhatua will avenge our murder, (and) a satisfaction will be -obtained_. - -_Akuanei_, rangona _rawatia_ mai, _e_ hoko _ana_ ano koe, _presently, -I_ SHALL _hear that you_ ARE STILL _purchasing_: lit., presently, -exactly as it has been heard, you are, &c. - -_Kua_ mate ahau, _e_ ora _ana_ ano nga rakau nei, _these trees will -live longer than I_: lit., I died, these trees are still alive. - -_Second future tense._--Vid. pag. 37. - - -POTENTIAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. - -_Present and imperfect._--(For examples of these vid. on _e_ page 136, -on _ka_ 138, and on _ai_ 146), _ko_ ahau _kia_ mate, ko ia _kia_ ora; -vid. on _kia_ (Sec.. c. 1,) also our remarks on ahei, taea, &c., as -auxiliaries. - -_Pluperfect._--_Kua_ riro au, na te mate o taku kotiro _i_ noho ai, _I -would have gone; but I remained in consequence of the sickness of my -daughter_: lit., I departed, my daughter's sickness was the cause of -my having remained; _e_ noho _ana_, _na_ Hone _i_ ngare, _he would -have stopped, but John sent him_: lit., he is remaining, John sent -him; _E_ murua a Hone, _naku i_ ora ai, _John would have been -plundered, but I saved him_; _me i_ kahore ahau _kua_ mate, _if it had -not been for me, he would have died_; _kua_ hemo ke ahau, _me_ i -_kaua_ ahau te whakapono, _I should have fainted if I had not -believed_; penei _kua_ ora, _in that case he would have been saved_; -_ka_ hua ahau, _i_ haere _ai_, _e_ rongo; _I thought that they would -have listened (which) was the cause of (my) having gone_; _ma_ku i -runga _e_ kore e marere, _when I am at the Southward (it) is never -granted_; ma raua e rere e kore e hohoro a Raiana, _when they both -run, Lion does not make haste_; me i maku e keri, keihea? _if it had -not been for me to dig it where (should I have been now)?_ i. e., I -should have dug to a vast distance.[45] - -The following combinations of times are incorrect: _i_ te mea _i_ -arahina nga Hurai, _while the Jews were being led_; it should be _e_ -arahina _ana_. _I_ kite hoki ratou i a ia, a, _i_ rere, _for they saw -him and fled_; it should be, _a_, rere _ana_. To ratou taenga atu ki -te pa, i reira ano mahara ana ratou ki a ia, _and when they had -reached the pa, they then recognised him_; it should be na, _ka_ -mahara, &c. Ma Hone _e_ whakaki o koutou peke, _pera_ hoki me o matou, -_John will fill your bags as full as ours_; it should be, _kia penei -me o matou_. It may be here noted that when two tenses are connected -together, not in the way of government, but are rather in apposition -with each other, the latter will generally be the same as, or at least -correspond to, the former; e. g., the following constructions are -erroneous:--_Korerotia_ atu, _mea ana_, _speak, saying_; it should be, -_meatia_. A ki atu _ana_ a Hone, ka _mea_; it should be, mea _ana_. Ka -tahi ahau _i_ kite, _now for the first time have I seen_; it should be -_ka_ kite. - - NOTE.--Sometimes, however, we meet with exceptions to this rule: (1) - when there is a clear case for the operation of epanorthosis; (2) - when the particles _a_ or _na_ intervene. - -The character of the sentence will sometimes be found to affect the -time of the verb; as, for example, in animated narration, where a -large measure of certainty, or when contingency is to be denoted, &c.; -e. g., Kihai i u ki uta, _kua_ tae ki te whare, _kua_ totoro ki te -maripi, ki te paoka, _E_ kai _ana_, _he had not landed, before he_ HAD -_reached the house_, HAD _stretched out (his hand) to the knife and -fork, (he) is eating_, i. e., immediately as soon as he landed he -began to eat; E pa ma, kia kaha, Kahore kua u, _My friends be strong, -(in pulling the oar), O no, we have landed_, i. e., we are close to -shore. A request or command, given to be conveyed to another, will -often be put into the imperative, just as if the individual, to whom -the request, &c., is to be delivered, were really present; e. g., Mea -atu ki a Hone, _Taihoa e haere_, _say to John, Don't go for a while_. -E kite koe i a te Keha, _Haere mai_, _if you see Keha_ (say to him), -_Come here_. - - NOTE.--This form is generally adopted when the speaker wishes to be - animated and abrupt. Sometimes, as in the first example, it is the - only form admissible. - -_Verbs associated to qualify each other._--It should here also be -noted that when two verbs are associated together, the latter of which -is modified in meaning by the former, in a way somewhat similar to -that in which the infinitive in Latin is modified by its governing -verb, the two verbs will, generally, be in the same tense and voice; -e. g., _Kua_ haere, _kua_ koroheke hoki, _he has begun to get old_, -lit., he is gone, he is old; _kei_ anga koe, _kei_ korero, _don't you -go and say, &c._; _e_ aratakina _ana_, e patua _ana_, _it is led to be -killed_. - -_Repetition of Verbs._--The same verb will frequently be repeated in -Maori when _contingency_, _intensity_, _distribution_, _diversity_, -_&c._, are intended, and, particularly, when the speaker desires to be -impressive and emphatic; e. g., Ko te mea i tupono i tupono: ko te mea -i kahore i kahore, _(the karakia Maori) is all a work of chance: -sometimes there is a successful hit, sometimes a failure_, lit., that -which hit the mark hit it, that which did not did not; e pakaru ana, e -pakaru ana ki tana mahi _(it does not much signify) if it breaks, it -is broken in his service_; okioki, okioki atu ki a i a, _trust, trust -in him_, i. e., place your whole trust in, &c.; haere ka haere, kai ka -kai, _in all his goings, in all his eatings_, i. e., whenever he -walks, or eats, (_he retains the same practice_); heoi ano ra, heoi -ano, _that is all about it, that is all about it_; hapai ana, hapai -ana, _raise both ends at the same time_; i. e., _while you raise, I -raise_. - - NOTE.--A similar usage obtains in other parts of the language; e. g., - ko wai, ko wai te haere? _who, who is to go?_ ko tera tera, _that is - another_, or _a different one_; he kanohi he kanohi, _face to face_; - ko Roka ano Roka, ko ahau ano ahau? _are Roka_ (my wife) _and I - different persons?_ lit., Is Roka Roka, and (am) I I? - -Sometimes the former verb will assume the form of the verbal noun; e. g., -te haerenga i haere ai, _the going with which he went_, i. e., so -on he proceeded; na, ko te tino riringa i riri ai, _so he was very -angry_. - - NOTE.--The learned student need not be reminded of the remarkable - parallel which Maori finds to the four last rules in Hebrew. From - this cause it will be sometimes found that an exactly literal - translation will be more idiomatic than another. Thus Gen. 1, 7, - "dying thou shalt die" could not be rendered more idiomatic than if - it be done literally: "na, ko te matenga e mate ai koe." - -_Of the Passive Verbs._--It has been already observed (p.p. 49, 56) -that passive verbs are often used in Maori in a somewhat more extended -sense than is met with in most languages. It may naturally, therefore, -be expected that their use should be more frequent than that of active -verbs: and such we believe to be the case,--Maori seeming to incline -peculiarly to the passive mode or form of statement, especially in the -secondary clauses of a sentence. Independently of other uses which -they subserve, (such as often supplying a more animated style of -narration, being sometimes the more convenient--as being the more -loose or general--mode in which to advance a sentiment, &c.), there -are two of considerable importance which may be here noticed. 1st. -They are most frequently employed when the relative pronoun is -understood, and are generally equivalent to the active verb with _ai_ -or _nei_, _&c._, after it; e. g., nga mahi i wakahaua e ia, _the works -which were ordered by him_. The active form here, without _ai_ after -it, would be seldom used. Vid. also, the examples p.p. 49, 51. 2ndly. -They sometimes supply the place of a preposition; e. g., he aha te mea -e _omakia_ nei? _what is the matter_ ABOUT WHICH _it is being run?_ Te -tangata i _korerotia_ nei, _the man about whom we were talking_. The -following sentence, ka korero ahau ki te whakapakoko, literally means, -_I will talk to the image_; it should have been, ka korero_tia_ te -whakapakoko. This usage, however, does not extend to all the -prepositions; and, when some of them are understood, the verb will -require _ai_ after it. The following sentence, for example, is -erroneous: te tangata e kainga ana te poaka,_the man by whom the pig -is eaten_; it should be _e_ kai _ana_, or _e_ kai _nei_, or _e_ kainga -_ai_. - -Constructions will not unfrequently be found in which the active form -usurps the place of the passive, and vice versa; e. g., Ko tena kua -hohoro te _horoi_, _let that be first washed_; kua _tahu_ te kai o te -kainga nei, _the food of the settlement has been kindled_, i. e., the -oven is kindled for cooking; Kei te _uta_ to matou waka, _our canoe is -loading_; Ko tehea te _patu_? _which is to be killed?_ ko tera kua -_panga_ noa ake, _that has been much longer on the fire_: lit., has -been thrown; taria e _kawhaki_ te poti, _let not the boat be taken -away (by you) for a while_; he mea _tiki_, _a thing fetched_; kua oti -te _keri_, _it is finished, the being dug_; me _wero_ e koe, _it must -be_ (or, _let it be_) _stabbed by you_; ka timata tena whenua, te -_tua_, _that land has commenced_ (I mean) _the being felled_; kei -reira, a Hone e _tanu_ ana, _there John (lies) buried_; _Ka te arai_ -taku ahi e koe, _my fire is being stopped up by you_, i. e., you are -intercepting the communication, &c.; kia rua nga waka e _hoe_ mai e -koe, _let there be two canoes that will be paddled here by you_. The -following form is not frequent:--kei te atawhaitia, _it the (pig) is -being taken care of_; kei te takina te kai, _the food is being taken -off (the fire)_. When ambiguity might arise from the object of the -action being considered as the _agent_, the passive form is almost -always used; e. g., ka poto nga tangata o reira _te kitea_, _when all -the men of that place have been seen_; ka tata tena tangata te nehua, -_that man is near being buried_. - -_Neuter Verbs which assume the passive form._--Some neuter verbs -assume the passive form (1) without any material alteration of -meaning; e. g., ka _hokia_ he huanga, _if it is come backwards and -forwards to you, it is because I am a relation_.[46] (2.) Most -frequently, however, they derive a transitive meaning from the change. -Thus, in the example already adduced, page 50, horihori, _to tell -falsehoods_; te mea i horihoria e koe he tangata, _the thing which you -erroneously said was a man_. Again,--Tangi, _to cry_: te tupapaku e -_tangihia_ nei, _the corpse which is being cried_, i. e., which is the -subject of the crying; he tangata haurangi, _a mad person_; te tangata -i haurangitia nei, _a person for whom another is bewildered_. - -[38] It is true that when _kua_ represents the pluperfect, or the -priority of one action to another, it may be frequently found in -connexion with _ko_. But this, we think, is a further confirmation of -the distinction for which we contend. For the expression "_he had -loved us_" is clearly more definite than "_he loved us_,"--the former -implying that that affection had been entertained _before some past -act_,--the latter simply affirming that it was entertained, without -reference to any date. _Ko_ we defined, page 106, as the article of -specification and emphasis, and it is quite natural that it should be -associated with a perfect to denote a pluperfect,--its office, in such -a construction, being to point out the individual who may be -emphatically said to _have_ performed the act--whose was the act which -was antecedent, or past. The sentence "ko ia kua atawhai," means _he -is the person who was first kind_. This emphatic use of the word _ko_ -has been already illustrated under the head of _comparison, -adjectives_; the sentence "_ko_ tenei te nui o nga rakau" meaning -_this is the large one of the trees_; i. e., this is the one of which -we may (emphatically) say, _It is large_. So, also, in the -following,--"akuanei _ko_ Hone _kua_ tae," the meaning is _presently_, -it will be John who (emphatically) HAS GOT _there_; i. e., John will -have got there first. - -[39] The student will see in this, and the other examples, that the -noun, as is very usual in Maori, assumes the form of a verb. To -translate literally such verbs into English is often impossible. - -[40] Following is a connected view of some of the principal means by -which the defect of the substantive verb is _sup_plied or _im_plied, -in Maori: he kuri tenei _this_ is _a dog_. Tenei a Hone, _This is -John_. Tika rawa, _it is very correct_. Ki te _whai_ hau i te po nei, -_if there be wind in the night_, _&c._ Ki te _wa_ hau, &c., _idem_. Ka -_ai_ au hei kianga mai mau, I _am for an ordering for you_, i. e., You -find in me one that will obey, &c. _Waiho_, and sometimes _meinga_, -are often used instead of _ai_. E _ai_ ki tana, _it is according to -his_, i. e., as he affirms. - -The following form is worthy of notice, Rokohanga rawatanga atu e -ahau, _ko_ Raiana! _on my reaching (that place)_ there WAS _Lion_; -rokohanga atu, _ko_ te tahi tangata o Taupo i Maungatautari e noho -ana, _when I got (there) there was a man of, &c._ Taku hoenga ki roto -_ko_ te waka o Hone, _as I was paddling up the river, lo, there was -the canoe of John, &c._ Some foreigners, we observe, use tera taua for -this form. We have never heard anything like it in Waikato. _Hei te_ -and _ki te_ (vid. page 62) will often, also, seem to lose their -distinctive meaning in that of the verb substantive; e. g., _hei te_ -pera me tou, _let it be like yours_. - -[41] It will also be recollected that the gerunds and participles -will, in that language, often subserve the same office. Thus we have, -ante domandum, _before they are tamed_; urit videndo, _he burns when -he looks_; cum Epicurus voluptate metiens summum bonum, _whereas -Epicurus who measures the chief good by pleasure_. - -[42] This is an exception to what we find in English, and other -languages, the finite verb in them being very seldom found after an -oblique case; i. e., after any case beside the nominative, unless the -relative, or the personal pronoun with some conjunction, intervene. We -may observe, also, that the verbal particles will be often prefixed to -other words beside the verb; e. g., e kore koe e pai _kia mau_ e -hanga? _Are you not willing that you should do it?_ _kia mou_ ai te -kainga, _that the land should be yours_. - -[43] That the English language had once a similar tendency might, we -think, be shewn by many examples. Thus we hear, "_have_ pity on me," -"_have_ her forth," "I _have_ remembrance of thee in my prayer." Many -of our tenses, also, are formed by this auxiliary; e. g., "_I have -seen_," "he _had_ gone," "I would _have_ loved, &c." The frequent use, -also, of this form in the Greek may be seen in Donnegan's Greek -Lexicon, under "_echo_," to hold. - -[44] As the English language supplies but few illustrations of this -mode of construction, we will here lay before the student some -extracts from Professor Lee's Hebrew Grammar, as well to shew how much -this usage obtains in Oriental languages, as to enable him to enter -more readily into the subject. Professor L. says, page 328, "any -writer commencing his narrative, will necessarily speak of past, -present, or future events with reference to the period in which his -statement is made." This, he says, is the "_absolute_ use of the -tense." Again, "A person may speak of those events with reference to -some other period, or event, already introduced into the context. This -is the _relative_ use--Hence, a preterite connected with another -preterite will be equivalent to our pluperfect; a present following a -preterite to our imperfect, and so on." Again, page 330, "They, the -Arabians, consider the present tense as of two kinds; one they term -the _real present_, which is what our grammarians always understand by -the _present tense_. The other they term _the present as to the -narration_; by which they mean the time contemporary with any event, -and which may therefore be considered as present _with it_, although -past, present, or future with regard to the _real_ or _absolute_ -present tense." In page 334 is a good illustration from the Persian: -"last night I _go_ to the house of a friend, and there _see_ a -delightful assembly, and _enjoy_ a most pleasing spectacle." The -student will see in the above example that _go_, _see_, and _enjoy_, -are _relative presents_, being presents to _last night_, the time in -which the speaker, in his imagination, now places himself. This mode -of construction abounds in the O. and N. T., vid., for example, Mark -xiv., _he saw Levi and says to him_. _Says_, here, is present to -_saw_, though past to the time of the narration. - -[45] NOTE.--The student is recommended to notice the various forms -contained in the preceding table, and to endeavour to add to them from -his own observation. It would also be most useful to throw into one -form all the various examples of simple and compound times that he -will find in pages 37, 41, to 44, as well also as those contained in -the preceding part of this chapter. - -[46] The passive verbs wheterongia, titahangia, &c., to which we -allude, page 39, note, may, we think, on reflection, be most correctly -reduced to this head. - - - - -CHAPTER XX. - -OF THE PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND CONJUNCTIONS. - - -These have been considered at large in chapters 8, 9, 10, 11, and -require now but little notice. We proceed to consider the prepositions -which follow the verbs, and to offer a few other remarks respecting -them. - -_Verbal postfixes._--An active verb will (as was observed page 60) -take _i_ after it, to denote the object of the action. Sometimes, -however, _ki_ will be found to supply its place; e. g., mohio _ki_ a -ia, matau _ki_ a ia, wehi _ki_ a ia, whakaaro _ki_ tena mea, karanga -_ki_ a ia, kua mau _ki_ te pu, _seized his gun_. Whiwhi _ki_ te toki, -_obtain an axe_, _&c._ - -Between these two prepositions, however, as verbal postfixes, there is -often a very important difference; e. g., na ka whakatiki ahau _i_ a -ia _ki_ te kai, _so I deprived him of food_, i. e., I withheld food -from him; na te aha koe i kaiponu ai _i_ to paraikete _ki_ a au? _why -did you withhold your blanket_ FROM _me?_ he pakeha hei whakawhiwhi -_i_ a matou _ki_ te kakahu, _an European to make us possess clothes_; -ki te hoko atu _i_ taku poaka _ki_ te tahi paraikete moku, _to sell my -pig for a blanket for myself_. Europeans generally employ _mo_, but -erroneously. Sometimes other prepositions will occupy the place of -_i_; ka haere ahau ki te whangai i taku kete riwai _ma_ taku poaka, _I -will go feed my basket of potatoes for my pig_, i. e., I will feed my -pigs with my basket of potatoes; hei patu moku, _to strike me -with_,--a form similar to hei patu _i_ a au. - - NOTE.--Verbal nouns will take the same case as their roots. - Occasionally no sign of case will follow the active verb, (1) when - the verb is preceded by such auxiliaries as taea, pau, taihoa, &c., - e. g., e kore e taea e ahau te hopu tena poaka, _it cannot be - accomplished by me (I mean) the catching that pig_; or, e kore e taea - tena _poaka_ e au, te _hopu_. (2.) When the verb is preceded by the - particle _me_, or by the prepositions _na_ and _ma_; e. g., _me_ hopu - _te poaka_ e koe, _the pig must be caught by you_; _na_ku i hopu - _tena_, _the having caught that (pig) was mine_. To this rule, - exceptions are sometimes heard. - -_Neuter Verbs_ will sometimes take an accusative case of the noun -proper to their own signification; e. g., e karakia ana _i tana -karakia_, _he is praying his prayers_; e kakahu ana i ona, _he is -garmenting his clothes_; i. e., is putting them on. - - NOTE.--Considerable variation will be found in the - prepositions which follow such verbs as heoi, ka tahi, &c.; e. g., - heoi ano te koti pai _nou_, _the only good coat is yours_; ka tahi - ano te koti pai, _nou_, _idem_; manawa te tangata korero teka, _he_ - pakeha (Taranaki), _a European is the greatest person for telling - falsehoods_; ka tahi ano taku tangata kino, _ko koe_ (or _ki_ a koe, - or _kei_ a koe); ka tahi ano tenei huarahi ka takahia _ki_ a koe, - _you are the first person who has trodden this path_; if it had been - _e_ koe, the meaning would have been _you now for the first TIME walk - this road_; often, also, the preposition will be omitted, and the - noun put into the nominative; e. g., noho rawa atu _he_ whenua ke, - _settled in a foreign land_; ka whakamoea atu _he_ tangata ke, _given - in marriage to another man_; te huihuinga mai o Mokau, o whea, o - whea, _ko_ te Wherowhero, _the musterings of Mokau, &c., &c., are to - Wherowhero_, i. e., Wherowhero is the grand object of interest. - -Between _i_ and _ki_ when following neuter verbs, or adjectives, there -is often a considerable difference; e. g., mate _ki_, _desirous of_; -mate _i_, _killed by_; kaha i te kino, _stronger_ THAN _sin_, i. e., -overcoming it; kaha _ki_ te kino, _strong_ IN _sinning_; ngakau kore -_ki_ tana kupu, _disinclined to, &c._; ngakau kore _i_, _discouraged -by_. - -Foreigners often err in the use of these, and other prepositions; e. g., -i a ia _ki_ reira, _while he was there_; it should be, _i_ reira. -E aha ana ia _ki_ reira? What is he doing there? it should be _i_ -reira. Kati _ki_ kona; it should be _i_ kona. E mea ana ahau kia kai -_i_ te Onewhero, _I am thinking of taking a meal at Onewhero_; it -should be, _ki_ te Onewhero. Hei a wai ranei te pono? hei a Maihi -ranei, hei a Pita ranei? _with whom is the truth? with Marsh or with -Peter?_ it should be, _I_ a wai, &c. He aha te tikanga o taua kupu nei -kei a Matiu? _what is the meaning of that expression in Matthew?_ it -should be _i_ a Matiu. Again,--kahore he mea _no_ te kainga nei hei -kai, _there is nothing in this settlement for food_; it should be, _o_ -te kainga nei. Enei kupu _no_ te pukapuka, _these words of the book_; -it should be, _o_ te pukapuka. Ko nga mea katoa _no_ waho, _all the -things outside_; it should be _o_ waho. He kahore urupa _o_ Kawhia i -kawea mai ai ki konei? _Was there no grave in Kawhia that you brought -him here?_ it should be, _no_ Kawhia. Again,--he mea tiki _i_ toku -whare, _a thing fetched from my house_. The meaning of this, as it -stands, is "a thing to fetch my house;" it should be, _no_ toku whare, -as in the following proverb: "he toka hapai mai _no_ nga whenua." In -constructions like these, the agent will take either _e_ or _na_ -before it, but most frequently the latter. In some tribes to the -Southward of Waikato, the following form is in common use:--he pakeke -ou, _yours are hardnesses_, i. e., you are a hard person; he makariri -oku i te anu, _I have colds from the cold (air)_. The singular forms -_tou_ and _toku_ are mostly used in Waikato, or the preposition _no_; -e. g., he pakeke _nou_, and makariri _noku_, or TOKU. - -Prepositions are sometimes used where a foreigner would expect a -verbal particle; e. g., _Kei_ te takoto a Hone, _John is lying down_; -_i te_ mate ahau, _I was poorly_; _No_ te tarai ahau i tena wahi, _I -have been hoeing that place_. This form belongs chiefly to Ngapuhi. Ka -tae te pakeke o te oneone nei! kahore _i te_ kohatu! How hard this -soil is! it is not at a stone, i. e., it is like a stone. Kahore ahau -_i te_ kite, _I don't see_. This last form is used chiefly in the -districts Southward of Waikato. - -_Adverbs._--Most of the adverbs will (as was observed, page 85) assume -the form of the word with which they are connected; e. g., rap_u_ -mar_ie_, rap_ua_ marie_tia_, rapu_nga_ marie_tanga_, _&c._ In some -districts, however, they will assume the form of the verbal noun, -after the passive voice; e. g., rapua marie_tanga_. Instances will, -also, occasionally be found in all parts of the island in which they -undergo no change; e. g., whiua _pena_, _throw it in that direction_. -Whiua _penatia_ is, _throw it in that manner_. - -_Negative Adverbs._--Most of these will, when in connexion with the -verb, take a verbal particle before, or after, them; e. g., _hore_ -rawa _kia_ pai; kahore i pai, or (sometimes), kahore _e_ pai; kihai -_i_[47] pai; _e_ kore _e_ pai; aua _e_ haere, kiano _i_ haere noa, _e_ -hara i a au, _it is not mine_, or, _it is different from me_ (i. e., -it was not I), &c. - -_Kihai i_ and _kahore i_ are most frequently used indifferently one -for the other. An experienced speaker will, however, we think, -sometimes notice points of difference, and particularly that _kihai i_ -is most frequently employed when reference is made to an act previous -to a past act, and _kahore i_ when some allusion is made to the -present time. Thus, in the following sentence, nau i kai nga kai -_kihai nei i_ tika kia kainga e te mea noa, we should prefer _kahore -nei i_ to denote _which_ WAS _not, and_ IS _not, lawful to be eaten by -a person not tapu_. In Waikato, haunga with kahore sometimes governs a -genitive case; e. g., _Kahore haunga o_ tena. Kahore, when it takes a -possessive case after it, will require it to be in the plural number; -e. g., Kahore _aku_ moni, _I have no money_, lit., there is a -negativeness of my monies. So also the particle _u_, vid. page 93. - -In answering a question, the answer will always be regulated by the -way in which the question is put, e. g., Kahore i pai? _ae_; _Was he -not willing? Yes_; i. e., Yes, he was not willing. If the answer was -intended to be affirmative, the speaker would have said "I pai ano." - -[47] Some foreigners, we observe, omit the _i_ after _kihai_, when it -immediately follows it. That this error, however, arises from the _I_ -being blended into the ai of _kihai_ in the pronunciation is clear -from its being distinctly heard when a word intervenes to prevent -elision, as in the following example:--_kihai_ ahau _i_ pai. - - - - -TESTIMONIALS TO THE FIRST EDITION. - - -The author cannot conclude without returning many acknowledgments to -those kind friends who have encouraged and assisted him in the -prosecution of this work. The following favorable notices from some of -their communications are here submitted to the reader's inspection. - - "For the purpose of advancing towards a more correct and idiomatic - knowledge of the Maori, I have found, and do daily find, its - assistance quite invaluable. Your exertions to supply a deficiency - which was keenly felt by every student of the Maori tongue cannot - fail to be highly appreciated, both here and at home."--_W. Martin, - Esq., Chief Justice of New Zealand._ - - "It is the only work that has ever been published that is calculated - to give a sound and critical knowledge of Maori. I have constant - reference to it in the publication of the Maori _Gazette_, and at all - times find it an invaluable assistant."--_George Clarke, Esq., - Aboriginal Protector._ - - "To allow you to suffer loss by the publication of your valuable - grammar, would be to suffer our justice to be called in - question."--_Rev. A. N. Brown, sen., Church Missionary of the - Southern District._ - - "I wish you could afford to carry on your work to another part, and - take in prosody, the native waiatas, proverbs, &c.; but I must not - dictate. You have done well, and your work deserves the praise and - encouragement of every one who feels an interest in the natives and - their language."--_Rev. J. Whiteley, sen. Wesleyan Missionary of the - Southern District._ - - "I think you deserve great credit for your performance, and am sure - that when the language is more known you will hear it. May I thank - you to set my name down as a subscriber for twenty copies of the - whole work."--_Rev. O. Hadfield, Senior Church Missionary of the Port - Nicholson District._ - - -FINIS. - - -Transcriber's Note (continued): - -Page 9, "Matou & Tatau" changed to "Matou & Matau" and "Ratou & Tatau" -to "Ratou & Ratau". - -Page 15, "k[)i]a" changed to "ki[)a]"; footnote 5, "oho" changed to -"oha". - -Page 19, "ko'iro" changed to "kotiro". - -Page 24, "K" changed to "Ka". - -Page 32, "taegata" changed to "tangata". - -Page 53, "?kore" transcribed as "Pakore". - -Page 54 footnote 13, "a?ero" transcribed as "arero". - -Page 61, "mal" changed to "mai". - -Page 64, "nohea" changed to "no hea". - -Page 109, "i?" transcribed as "ia". - -Page 113, "Wherowhoro" changed to "Wherowhero". - -Page 118, "is" changed to "ia" (twice). - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Grammar of the New Zealand language -(2nd edition), by Robert Maunsell - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GRAMMAR OF NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE *** - -***** This file should be named 44897.txt or 44897.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/8/9/44897/ - -Produced by Heiko Evermann, Chris Pinfield and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This -book was produced from scanned images of public domain -material from the Google Print project.) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at - www.gutenberg.org/license. - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 -North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email -contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the -Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |